Home
        CLS200 Series User's Guide
         Contents
1.                Table 2 5  TB18 Connections  Control Output   Terminal Function CLS204 CLS208  1  5V   dc   2 CTRL COM  3 Watchdog timer  4 Global alarm  5 Output 1 Loop 1 heat Loop 1 heat  6 Output 2 Loop 2 heat Loop 2 heat  7 Output 3 Loop 3 heat Loop 3 heat  8 Output 4 Loop 4 heat Loop 4 heat  9 Output 5 Pulse loop heat Loop 5 heat  10 Output 6 Loop 1 cool Loop 6 heat  11 Output 7 Loop 2 cool Loop 7 heat  12 Output 8 Loop 3 cool Loop 8 heat  13 Output 9 Loop 4 cool Pulse loop heat  14 Output 10 Pulse loop cool Loop 1 cool  15 Output 34  Serial DAC clock Serial DAC clock  16 Input 1  17 Input 2  18 Input 3 Pulse input       40    1 The indicated outputs are dedicated for control when enabled in  the loop setup  If one or both of a loop   s outputs are disabled  the  corresponding digital outputs become available for alarms or   ramp soak events     2 yf you install a Watlow Anafaze Serial DAC  the CLS200 series  controller uses digital output 34 for a clock line  You cannot use  output 34 for anything else when you have a Serial DAC installed     Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    TB50 Connections    Chapter 2  Installation                                                                                        Table 2 6  TB50 Connections for CLS204 and  CLS208  Control Output  Control Output   Ter    Function   CLS208 CLS204 Ter    Function   CLS208   CLS204  minal minal  1  5V  dc  2  5V   dc   3 CTRL COM 4 CTRL COM  5 Not Used 6 Watchd
2.         0 162 in  diameter   4 mm     0 3 in  0 4 in    8 mm   10 mm     Figure 11 8 Dual DAC Dimensions    Watlow Anafaze 207    Chapter 11  Specifications    Dual DAC Inputs    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The Dual DAC accepts an open collector signal from the  CLS200 controller and the power from an external power  supply  See Table 11 31     Table 11 31 Dual DAC Power Requirements                Parameter Description  Voltage 12 to 24V   dc   Current 100 mA   15V   dc           Dual DAC Analog Outputs    Table 11 32 Dual DAC Specifications by Output                                           Range  Version 4 20 mA 0 5V 0 10 V Units  Gain Accuracy  6  6   6  o   Output Offset  0 75  0 75  0 75 poh Ml scale  range  o   Ripple 1 6 1 6 1 6 Mgt Mil scale  range  Time Constant 2 2 2 seconds  Maximum Current Output 20 10 10 mA dc  Load Resistance  12V  250 maximum   500 minimum   1000 minimum Q  Load Resistance  24V  850 maximum n a n a Q          208    Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000         CLS200 Series User   s Guide Chapter 11  Specifications    Serial DAC Specifications    Watlow Anafaze offers a Serial DAC for precision open loop  analog outputs  The Serial DAC is jumper selectable for a  0 to 10V   dc  or 4 to 20 mA output  Multiple Serial DAC   modules can be used with one CLS200  The Serial DAC car   ries a CE mark     Table 11 33 Serial DAC Environmental Specifi              cations  Storage Temperature  20 to 60   C  Operating Temperature Oto 70  C  Humidit
3.      English    Classification  Installation Category Il  Pollution Degree Il  Rated Voltage  15 to 24 VDC  Rated Current  610mA maximum    Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directive s  using the relevant  section s  of the normalized standards and related documents shown     89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive    EN 61326  1997 Electrical equipment for measurement  control and  laboratory use   EMC requirements  Class A    EN 61000 3 2  1995 Limits for harmonic current   EN 61000 3 3  1995 Limitations of voltage fluctuations and flicker   EN 61000 4 2  1995 Electrostatic discharge   EN 61000 4 3  1997 Radiated immunity   EN 61000 4 4  1995 Electrical fast transients   EN 61000 4 5  1995 Surge immunity   EN 61000 4 6  1994 Conducted immunity   EN 61000 4 11  1994 Voltage dips  short interruptions and  voltage variations immunity   ENV 50204  1995 Cellular phone    D  clare que le produit suivant    D  signation    Num  ro s  de mod  le s      Fran  ais  S  rie CLS200  2    04  08 ou 16     1  2  3 ou 4   0 1 ou 2    0  1 ou 2   0  1  2 ou 3   0  1  2 ou 3   0  1 ou 2    1 ou 2 lettres ou chiffren   Classification   Installation cat  gorie II  degr   de pollution II  Tension nominale   15    24V c c   Courant nominal   610 mA maximum  Conforme aux exigences de la  ou des  directive s  suivante s  de l Union  Europ  enne figurant aux sections correspondantes des normes et documents  associ  s ci dessous      89 336 EEC Directive de
4.     HEAT RETRANS MIN INP       HEAT RETRANS MIN OUT   HEAT RETRANS MAX INP    CASCADE MIN SP  CASCADE MAX SP    RATIO CONTROL MAX SP  RATIO CONTROL CTRL RATIO    COPY SETUP FROM PROFILE       HEAT RETRANS MIN OUT   HEAT RETRANS MAX INP       HEAT RETRANS MAX OUT     CASCADE HT SPAN    RATIO CONTROL SP DIFF    READY SEGMENT SETPOINT    OUT OF TOLRNCE ALARM TIME       HEAT RETRANS MAX OUT           COOL OUTPUT RETRANS PV  COOL RETRANS MIN INP       COOL RETRANS MIN OUT           COOL RETRANS MAX INP  COOL RETRANS MAX OUT           CASCADE CL SPAN       READY SEGMENT EDIT EVENTS       COOL RETRANS MIN INP    COOL OUTPUT RETRANS PV READY EVENT OUTPUT    EXTERNAL RESET INPUT NUMBER       COOL RETRANS MIN OUT     EDIT SEGMENT NUMBER       COOL RETRANS MAX INP       COOL RETRANS MAX OUT     SEGMENT    SEG TIME  SEGMENT    SEG SETPT          SEGMENT    EDIT SEG EVENTS       SEG    EVENT   OUTPUT    SEG    EV  DO   ACTIVE STATE    SEGMENT    EDIT SEG TRGGRS  SEG    TRIG   INPUT NR     SEG   TR  DI   ACTIVE STATE    SEG    TR  Di   TRIG                   SEGMENT    SEG TOLERANCE  SEGMENT    LAST SEGMENT          REPEAT CYCLES          Declaration of Conformity    Declaration of Conformity    CLS200Series          WATLOW ANAFAZE  314 Westridge Drive  Watsonville  California 95076 USA    Declares that the following product    Designation  CLS200 Series   Model Number s   2  04  08 or 16     1 2 3 or 4   0 1 or 2   0 or 2    0 1 2 or 3   0 1 2 or 3   0 1  or 2    1 or 2 letters or numbers
5.     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HI PROC ALARM       SETPT   1000          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any point within the scaled sensor  range     High Process Alarm Type    Select an alarm type for the high process alarm     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HI PROC ALARM    TYPE   OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  OFF  ALARM  or CONTROL     High Process Alarm Output Number    Choose a digital output to activate when the high process  alarm occurs  if desired     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HI PROC ALARM       OUTPUT  NONE    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  NONE  or any output from 1 to 34 not  enabled for closed loop control or for the Serial DAC clock     Deviation Alarm Value    Set the deviation from setpoint at which the high and low  deviation alarms occur     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 DEV ALARM    VALUE   5    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 255  25 5  2 55   255 or 0255   depending on the INPUT TYPE and DISP FORMAT settings     100 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 4  Setup    High Deviation Alarm Type    Select an alarm type for the high deviation alarm        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HI DEV ALARM    TYPE   OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  ALARM  CONTROL or OFF       High Deviation Alarm Output Number    Choose a digital output to activate when the high deviation  alarm occurs  if desired        LOOP PROCESS UNITS   
6.     The control status indicator shows MAN  AUTO or TUNE  modes     If both control outputs for a loop are enabled and the loop  is in automatic control  then the single loop display shows  HEAT or COOL as the control status     P Variabl  ei PUR Engineering Units         Loop Number           or Name  ptoor T Cool Output  02 160  F 0 Percentage  180HEAT100    ALAR Heat Output  Setpoint Control Status Percentage    Figure 3 5 Single Loop Display  Heat and Cool  Outputs Enabled    Navigating the Single Loop Display    Doc   0600 3050 2000    In the single loop display    e Press YES to go to the next loop    e Press NO to go to the previous loop    e Press BACK once to go to the job display  if enabled  or  bar graph display    e Press ENTER twice to start the single loop scanning dis   play  The single loop scanning display shows informa     tion for each loop in sequence  Data for each loop  displays for one second     e Press any key to stop scanning     Watlow Anafaze 57    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Alarm Displays    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    If a process  deviation  failed or system sensor alarm oc   curs  the controller switches from any Single Loop display  or Bar Graph display to the Single Loop display for the loop  with the alarm  The global alarm output turns on and a  two character alarm code appears in the lower left corner  of the Single Loop display  If the alarm is for a failed sen   sor  a short message appears in place of the process vari   able an
7.     a    io 00 000                  lt  3 7 in    Y  ee a  H    3 00 in  91 mm    76 mm                  94 mm                 Electrical  connections  CI        a 4 40 in               gt       112 mm     20    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Installation of the Dual DAC and Serial DAC is essentially  the same  The main differences are in the dimensions and  the wiring  Follow this procedure to correctly install these  devices     The output signal range of the Dual DAC and Serial DAC  modules is configured with jumpers  See Configuring Dual  DAC Outputs on page 186 and Configuring Serial DAC  Outputs on page 188 for information on setting these jump   ers     1  Select a location  The unit is designed for wall mount   ing  Install it as close to the controller as possible     2  Mark and drill four holes for screw mounting  Holes  accommodate  8  4 0 mm  size screws  See Figure 2 11  for screw locations  Install the unit with the four    screws   Serial DAC  0 3 in 0 3 in   8 mm  4 holes for  8  4 0 mm   8 mm     screws or bolts           ooo     3 62 in Electrical    connections  76 mm                                                                     0 37 in wt 87 in   9 mm   lt  lt  47 in           gt   9 mm    119 mm      lt     0 65 in 0 65 in   17 mm     ir mim   1 75 in     Emm  connections mm     en EES     5 40 in                3   137 mm   Figure 2 11 Dual DAC and Serial DAC  Dimensions  Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2
8.    Any unused inputs should be set to SKIP or jumpered to  avoid thermocouple break alarms     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 2  Installation    Thermocouple Connections    Doc   0600 3050 2000    NOTE     A    CAUTION     Connect the positive lead of any of the supported thermo   couple types to the IN  terminal for one of the loops and the  negative lead to the corresponding IN  terminal     Use 18 or 20 AWG  0 5 or 0 75 mm     for all the thermocou   ple inputs  Most thermocouple wire is solid  unshielded  wire  When using shielded wire  ground one end only                                   CHN     White  Type J  semis we Red thermocouple  Shield  if present   NAN  Earth Ground   For CLS216 use Com at Process End    Figure 2 16 Thermocouple Connections    When mixing current inputs with low voltage    inputs  thermocouples or voltage inputs  lt 1V   to a CLS216  connect the current signal to the  IN  and Ref Com terminals  If no low voltage  sensors are used  connect current inputs to  the IN  and Com terminals on TB1  For all in   puts to a CLS204 or CLS208  connect the  sensors to the IN  and Com terminals     Ground loops and common mode noise can    damage the controller or disrupt measure   ments  To minimize ground loops and com   mon mode noise     e With a CLS216  use only ungrounded ther   mocouples with each thermocouple sheath  electrically connected to earth ground  The  negative sensor terminals on the CLS216 are
9.    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 27    Chapter 2  Installation CLS200 Series User s Guide    Testing Your System    This section explains how to test the controller after instal   lation and prior to making field wiring connections     TB50 or TB18 Test    Use this procedure to verify that the TB50 or TB18 is prop   erly connected and supplied with power     1  Turn on power to the CLS200  The display should read  CALCULATING CHECKSUM then show the bar graph  display   See Figure 3 3   If you do not see these dis   plays  disconnect power and check wiring and power  supply output     2  Measure the  5V   dc  supply at the TB50 or TB18     a  Connect the voltmeter   s common lead to TB50 or  TB18 terminal 3 or TB18 terminal 2     b  Connect the voltmeter   s positive lead to TB50 or  TB18 screw terminal 1  The voltage should be   4 75 to  5 25V   de      Digital Output Test    Use this procedure to test the controller   s outputs before  loads are connected  If using it at another time for trouble   shooting  disconnect loads from outputs before testing     1  Connect a 500    to 100 kQ resistor between TB50 or  TB18 screw terminal 1 and a digital output terminal    See Table 2 5  TB18 Connections on page 40  Table  2 6  TB50 Connections for CLS204 and CLS208 on  page 41  or Table 2 7  TB50 Connections for CLS216 on  page 42      2  Connect the voltmeter   s positive lead to screw terminal 1   Connect the common lead to the digital output terminal     4  Use the digital 
10.    Indicates pertinent information or an item    that may be useful to document or label for  later reference     Accessories may or may not be shipped in the same con   tainer as the CLS200  depending upon their size  Check the  shipping invoice carefully against the contents received in  all boxes     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide    Product Features    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 1  System Overview    The CLS200 series controllers provide 4  8 or 16 fully inde   pendent control loops  When used as a stand alone control   ler  you may operate the CLS200 via the two line 16   character display and touch keypad  You can also use it as  the key element in a computer supervised data acquisition  and control system  the CLS200 can be locally or remotely  controlled via an EIA TIA 232 or EIA TIA 485 serial com   munications interface     The CLS200 features include     e Direct Connection of Mixed Thermocouple Sen   sors  Connect most thermocouples to the controller  with no hardware modifications  Thermocouple inputs  feature reference junction compensation  lineariza   tion  process variable offset calibration to correct for  sensor inaccuracies  detection of broken  shorted or re   versed thermocouples  and a choice of Fahrenheit or  Celsius display    e Accepts Resistive Temperature Detectors   RTDs   Use 3 wire  100 9  platinum  0 00385 curve  sensors with two choices for range and precision of  measurements   To use this input  order 
11.   233  COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL  default value 74  description 80  location 73  233  computer  see communications 174  control algorithms 153 156  on off 154  proportional  P  154  161  proportional with integral  PI  155  161  proportional  integral and derivative  PID  155   161  control outputs 157 162  action 96  automatic control  see automatic control  cascade control  see cascade control  control algoritms  see control algorithms  control status  see control status  curve 98  cycle time 95  direct action 96  159  disabling 94  distributed zero crossing 94  158  Dual DAC  see Dual DAC  enabling 94  filter 91  158  limit 96  manual control  see manual control  on off 94  157    222 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    process variable retransmit 113  ratio control  see ratio control  reverse action 96  159  SCRs 37  Serial DAC  see Serial DAC  solid state relays 37  spread 92  status on power up 78  time proportioning 94  157  troubleshooting 172 173  wiring 37  control parameters 90 92  control status 61 64  symbols on display 56  unexpected switches from automatic to  manual 167  controller  agency compliance 193  clearance 13  195  connecting to TB50 27  dimensions 194  environment 194  input specifications 200 202  mounting 13 16  output specifications 202 204  specifications 193 196  terminal specifications 196  troubleshooting  see troubleshooting  wire sizes 196  CONTROLLER ADDRESS  default value 74  description 79  location 73  233  COOL 56  COOL CONTRO
12.   Check the display or software for a failed  sensor message        Digital job select feature is  enabled and has changed  jobs    Set JOB SELECT DIG INPUTS to NONE   This parameter is only accessile using the  controller s keypad and display  See Job  Select Digital Inputs on page 76        All loops are set to  manual 0     Power is intermittent    Check wiring and service  See Wiring the  Power Supply on page 25     Use a separate dc supply for the controller   Provide backup power  UPS      Set POWER UP OUTPUT STATUS to MEM   ORY  See Power Up Output Status on page  78        Analog reference voltage is  overloaded    Disconnect any wiring from the  5V Ref  connection on TB1        Hardware failure    Check the controller front panel for a hard   ware alarm  See System Alarms on page  166        Controller does not  behave as expected          Corrupt or incorrect values in  RAM       Perform a NO key reset  See NO Key  Reset on page 176           Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze 167    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    Corrective and Diagnostic Procedures    Low Power    Battery Dead    Ambient Warning    168    NOTE     The following sections detail procedures you may use to di   agnose and correct problems with the controller     If the controller displays LOW POWER or the display is not lit   1  Acknowledge the alarm     2  If the error message remains  turn the power to the  controller off  then on again     3  If the e
13.   Installation    System Wiring    Successful installation and operation of the control system  can depend on placement of the components and on selec   tion of the proper cables  sensors  and peripheral compo   nents    Routing and shielding of sensor wires and proper ground   ing of components can insure a robust control system  This  section includes wiring recommendations  instructions for  proper grounding and noise suppression  and consider   ations for avoiding ground loops     A    WARNING  To reduce the risk of electrical shock  fire   and equipment damage  follow all local and  national electrical codes  Correct wire sizes   fuses and thermal breakers are essential for  safe operation of this equipment        A    CAUTION  Do not wire bundles of low voltage signal  and control circuits next to bundles of high   voltage ac wiring  High voltage may be induc   tively coupled onto the low voltage circuits   which may damage the controller or induce  noise and cause poor control     Physically separate high voltage circuits  from low voltage circuits and from CLS200  hardware  If possible  install high voltage ac  power circuits in a separate panel     Wiring Recommendations  Follow these guidelines for selecting wires and cables     e Use stranded wire   Solid wire can be used for fixed  service  it makes intermittent connections when you  move it for maintenance      e Use 20 AWG  0 5 mm   thermocouple extension wire   Larger or smaller sizes may be difficult to instal
14.   PROCESS UNITS   A READY EVENT   OUTPUT 15  OFF   ALARM SETPOINT STATUS  OUT   Selectable values  ON or OFF   When you are done  press BACK to return to READY SEG   MENT EDIT EVENTS  then press NO to go to the next pa   rameter              External Reset Input Number    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Select one of the eight digital inputs as an external reset   When the reset input is on  the profile is set to RUN mode at  the beginning of the first segment  As long as the reset in   put is on  the profile is held at the beginning of the first seg   ment  Once the reset input turns off the profile begins to  run        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  A EXTERNAL RESET  INPUT NUMBER  N    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  1 to 8  or N  for no external reset      Watlow Anafaze 139    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Edit Segment Number    Segment Time    Segment Setpoint    140    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Each profile is made up of several segments  up to 20    Choose the segment to edit        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A EDIT SEGMENT    NUMBER  15    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  1 to 20     The first time you use this parameter  it defaults to seg   ment 1  When you finish editing a segment  the controller  goes to the next segment  This loop continues until you  make a segment the last segment of a profile     Enter the duration of the segment     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEGMENT 11    SEG TIME  000 00    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectabl
15.   Set the setpoint to a value as near the normal operat   ing temperature as is safe for the system     WARNING  During autotuning  the controller will set the    Using Alarms    Alarm Delay    64    output to 100  until the process variable rises  near the setpoint  Set the setpoint within the  safe operating limits of your system     4  Use the three key sequence  ENTER  ALARM ACK  CHNG  SP  to access the setup menus  In the SETUP LOOP  INPUT menu  locate the INPUT FILTER parameter   Note the setting and then change it to 0 SCANS     Press the BACK key until the single loop display appears   Press the MAN AUTO key   Press the NO key to toggle to the TUNE mode     Press the ENTER key to begin tuning the loop  TUNE  flashes throughout the tuning process  When tuning is  completed the control status indicator changes to AUTO     9  Adjust the setpoint to the desired temperature   10  Restore the INPUT FILTER parameter to its original value     The CLS200 has three main types of alarms   e   Failed sensor alarms  e   Process alarms    e System alarms    You can set the controller to delay normal alarm detection  and alarm reporting  There are two kinds of alarm delay     e Start up alarm delay delays process alarms  but not  failed sensor alarms  for all loops for a time period you  set at the STARTUP ALARM DELAY parameter in the  SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS menu    e Loop alarm delay delays failed sensor alarms and pro   cess alarms for one loop until the alarm condition is  conti
16.   TB50 Physical Specifications 196  Inputs 200  Outputs 202   CLS200 Power Supply 205   Dual DAC Specifications 207  Dual DAC Inputs 208  Dual DAC Analog Outputs 208   Serial DAC Specifications 209  Serial DAC Inputs 210  Serial DAC Analog Outputs 211    Glossary 213  Index 221  Menu Structure 233    Declaration of Conformity 234    viii Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    List of Figures    1 System Overview    Figure 1 1   CLS200 Part Numbering 5   Figure 1 2   CLS200 Special Inputs Parts List 6  Figure 1 3   CLS200 Rear Views 7   Figure 1 4   CLS200 Front Panel 8   Figure 1 5   TB50 8    2 Installation    Figure 2 1   CLS200 System Components 12   Figure 2 2   Clearance with Straight SCSI Cable 14   Figure 2 3   Clearance with Right Angle SCSI Cable 14   Figure 2 4   Wiring Clearances 15   Figure 2 5   Mounting Bracket 16   Figure 2 6   Mounting the TB50 16   Figure 2 7   TB50 Mounted on a DIN Rail  Front  17   Figure 2 8   TB50 Mounted on DIN Rail  Side  17   Figure 2 9   Mounting a TB50 with Standoffs 18   Figure 2 10   CLS200 Power Supply Mounting Bracket 19   Figure 2 11   Dual DAC and Serial DAC Dimensions 20   Figure 2 12   CLS200 Series Controller with TB18 25   Figure 2 13   CLS200 Series Controller with TB50 25   Figure 2 14   Power Connections with the CLS200 Power Supply 27  Figure 2 15   CLS200 Connector Locations 30   Figure 2 16   Thermocouple Connections 31   Figure 2 17   RTD Connections to CLS204 or CLS208 32   Figure 2 18   Linear Voltage Signal Con
17.   Table 9 6 Resistor Values for CLS204 and             CLS208 Current Inputs  Input Range Resistor Value RD  0 to 10 mA 6 0 Q  0 to 20 mA 3 0 Q                Resistor tolerance   0 1                                               RP   ma  RD  Table 9 7 Resistor Locations for CLS204 and  CLS208 Current Inputs  Resistor Resistor  Loop Location RD Loop Location RD  1 RPI 5 RP5  2 RP2 6 RP6  3 RP3 7 RP7  4 RP4 8 RP8                   Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 181    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    CLS204 and CLS208 Voltage Inputs    For each voltage input on a CLS204 and CLS208 controller  you must install two resistors  The resistances must be cor   rect for the expected input range  Note the resistor pack   RP  locations have three through holes  Install the RD re   sistor as indicated in the illustration below     Table 9 8 Resistor Values for CLS204 and  CLS208 Voltage Inputs    182    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                                   Resistor Values  Input Range RC RD  0 to100mV   dc  499 Q 750 Q  0 to 500mV   dc  5 49 kQ 750 Q  0 to 1V   dc  6 91 kQ 442 02  0 to 5V   dc  39 2 KQ 475 0 Q  0 to 10V   dc  49 9 kQ 301 0 Q  0 to 12V   dc  84 5 KQ 422 02  Resistor tolerance   0 1   RP   a  RD    Table 9 9 Resistor Locations for CLS204 and  CLS208 Voltage Inputs                                     Resistor Locations  Loop RC RD  1 R58 RP1  2 R56 RP2  3 R54 RP3  4 R52 RP4  5 R50 RP5  6 R48 RP6  7 R46 RP7  8 R44 
18.   derivative constant  see derivative  integral term  see integral  proportional band  see proportional band  settings for various applications 162  settings from other controllers 161  tuning 159 161  PLC  transmitting process data to 113  using to set a setpoint  example 129  see also communications  power failure 10  output status upon restart 78  ramp soak profile upon restart 152    Watlow Anafaze 227    Index    power supply  dimensions 205 206  dimensions of mounting bracket 19  for Dual DAC 43  inputs 206  mounting 18 19  outputs 206  powering loads with 36  requirements 18  specifications 205 206  wiring 25 27  POWER UP OUTPUT STATUS  default value 74  description 78  effect on ramp soak profiles 152  location 73  233  process alarms  alarm high 67  alarm low 67  boost output 67  function 67  high deviation 68  low deviation 68  outputs 67  setting up 66  PROCESS POWER DIGIN  default value 74  description 79  location 73  233  process variable  not displayed correctly 22  167  171  retransmit  see process variable retransmit  process variable retransmit 113 118  application example 115  scaling the output 115  setting up  example 116  setup parameters 113  profile  see ramp soak  proportional band  and cascade control 123  description 154  guidelines for setting 159  161 162  setting a value 91  settings for various temperature ranges 159  settings from other controllers 161  protocol 80  pulse inputs  display format 87  encoder signals 34  engineering units 84  loop
19.   head  of the screw facing the back of the processor module    Push each bracket backward then to the side to secure  it to the processor module case     8  Make sure the case is seated properly  Tighten the in   stallation screws firmly against the mounting collar to  secure the unit  Ensure that the end of the mounting  screws fit into the indentations on the mounting collar     Mounting the TB50    There are two ways you can mount the TB50  Use the pre   installed DIN rail mounting brackets or use the plastic  standoffs  Follow the corresponding procedures to mount    the board         TB50  Mounted  with Standoffs       PEUEGEREGUER    TB50  Mounted to  DIN Rail                   Figure 2 6 Mounting the TB50    16 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    DIN Rail Mounting    Snap the TB50 on to the DIN rail by placing the hook side  on the rail first  then pushing the snap latch side in place    See Figure 2 7                8O98O8O8O88OO                    208008008009                 EEEEEEEEECEENEN             Figure 2 7 TB50 Mounted on a DIN Rail  Front     To remove the TB50 from the rail  use a flathead screwdriv   er to unsnap the bracket from the rail   See Figure 2 8             S5       D        Removal  catch for  screwdriver          DIN Rail  snap latch                            Hook side    Figure 2 8 TB50 Mounted on DIN Rail  Side     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 17    Chapter 2  Installation CLS2
20.   on page 68      e   Activates the digital output that is assigned to the pro   cess alarm  if applicable   The digital output remains  active until the process variable returns within the  corresponding limit and deadband  The alarm output  deactivates when the process returns to normal     Any digital output that is not used as a control output can  be assigned to one or more process alarms     The controller activates the output if any alarm assigned to  the output is active  Process alarm outputs are non latch   ing   that is  the output is deactivated when the process re   turns to normal  whether or not the alarm has been  acknowledged     Specify the active state of process alarm outputs at the DIG  OUT POLARITY ON ALARM setting in the SETUP GLOBAL  PARAMETERS     You can configure each process alarm as either a control or  alarm     e Alarm configuration provides traditional alarm func   tionality  The operator must acknowledge the alarm  message on the controller display  a latching global  alarm is activated  and the alarm can activate a user   specified non latching alarm output     e Control configuration provides on off control output  using the alarm setpoints  For example  you could con   figure a high deviation alarm to turn on a fan  The  alarm activates a user specified non latching output   Alarm messages do not have to be acknowledged  and  the global alarm is not activated     A high process alarm occurs if the process variable rises  above a user specif
21.   tied to analog common     e With a CLS204 or CLS208  do not mix  grounded and ungrounded thermocouples  If  any thermocouple connected to the control   ler is of grounded construction  all thermo   couples should be of grounded construction    Watlow Anafaze 31    Chapter 2  Installation    RTD Input Connections    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    and each should be connected to ground at  the process end     e Connect the earth ground terminal on TB2  to a good earth ground  but do not connect  the analog common to earth ground  The  CLS200 uses a floating analog common for  sensor measurements  The noise protection  circuits on the sensor inputs function cor   rectly only when the controller is correctly in   stalled  See Ground Loops on page 24     This input type requires scaling resistors  Watlow Anafaze  recommends that you use a 100   3 wire platinum RTD to  prevent reading errors due to cable resistance  If you use a  2 wire RTD  jumper the negative input to common  If you    must use a 4 wire RTD  leave the fourth wire unconnected     CH IN           100 QRTD    CH IN e  Com e                Figure 2 17 RTD Connections to CLS204 or  CLS208    Reference Voltage Terminals    Voltage Input Connections    32    The  5V Ref and Ref Com terminals are provided in order  to power external bridge circuits for special sensors  Do not  connect any other types of devices to these terminals     This input type requires scaling resistors  Special input re   sistors installed at W
22.  01 HI DEV ALARM    OUTPUT   NONE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  NONE  or any output from 1 to 34 not  enabled for closed loop control or for the Serial DAC clock     Low Deviation Alarm Type    Select an alarm type for the low deviation alarm     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LO DEV ALARM    TYPE   OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  ALARM  CONTROL or OFF     Low Deviation Alarm Output Number    Choose a digital output to activate when the low deviation  alarm occurs  if desired        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LO DEV ALARM    OUTPUT   NONE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  NONE  or any output from 1 to 34 not  enabled for closed loop control or for the Serial DAC clock     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 101    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    Low Process Alarm Setpoint  Set a low process alarm setpoint  See Process Alarms on    page 66     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LO PROC ALARM       SETPT  0          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value within the input sensor   s  range     Low Process Alarm Type    Select an alarm type for the low process alarm        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LO PROC ALARM  TYPE   OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  ALARM  CONTROL or OFF     Low Process Alarm Output Number  Choose a digital output to activate when the low process    alarm occurs  if desired     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LO PROC ALARM       OUTPUT  
23.  112  233  RATIO CONTROL MSTR LOOP  description 125  location 112  233  RATIO CONTROL SP DIFF  description 126  location 112  233  READY EVENT OUTPUT  description 139  location 136  233  READY SEGMENT EDIT EVENTS  description 139  location 136  233  READY SEGMENT SETPOINT  description 138       Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    location 136  233  Ref terminals  see reference voltage  reference voltage 32  204  remote analog setpoint  see ratio control  repair  returning controller for 164  REPEAT CYCLES  description 144  location 136  233  reset  external 139  integral  see integral  NO key reset 176  RESET PROFILE 148  RESET WITH DEFAULTS 176  RESTORE PID DIGIN  default value 90  description 92  location 73  233  RestoreAuto parameter 66  retransmit  see process variable retransmit  returning the controller 164  reverse action  see control outputs  REVERSED T C DETECT  default value 82  description 85  location 73  233  RFI  see noise  RMA number 164  RO alarm code 166  RS alarm code 166  RS 232  see EIA TIA 232  RS 485  see EIA TIA 485  RT alarm code 166  RTD  accuracy 201  offset 84  range 201  recommended type 32  resolution 201  scaling resistors 32  183  troubleshooting 171  wiring 32  RTD open alarm 66  RTD shorted alarm 66    S    safety  external safety devices 9  output status on power up 10  symbols and signal words in this manual 2  SAVE SETUP TO JOB  CANNOT SAVE JOB 75  default value 74  description 75  location 73  233  scaling parameters  
24.  115  derivative  description 155  guidelines for setting 160 162  setting a value 91  settings from other controllers 161  term versus rate settings 160  DEV ALARM VALUE  default value 99  description 100  location 73  233  deviation alarms  see process alarms  differential control  see ratio control 131  DIG OUT POLARITY ON ALARM  default value 74  description 81  location 73  233  DIGITAL INPUTS  default value 103  description 103    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Index    location 73  233  using for testing 29  digital inputs  external switching devices 39  functions activated 39  output override 77  ramp soak external reset 139  ramp soak triggers 142  remote job selection 76 77  restoring control after sensor failure 92  specifications 202  technical information 38  testing 29  103  thermocouple short detection 79  troubleshooting 173  wiring 38  DIGITAL OUTPUT NUMBER  default value 103  description 104  location 73  233  digital outputs  polarity for alarms 81  ramp soak events 141  specifications 203  testing 28  104  troubleshooting 173  will not turn on 22  wiring 35 36  dimensions  controller 194  Dual DAC 20  207  power supply 205 206  power supply bracket 19  Serial DAC 20  209  TB50 196 199  direct action  see control outputs  DISP FORMAT  default value 82  description 87  effect on ramp soak parameters 144  location 73  233  scaling parameters 86  values 87  display  bar graph  see bar graph display  does not work 167  job display 60  process variable not correct 167 
25.  125     Remote Analog Setpoint Example  Setting a Setpoint with a PLC    Remote analog setpoint allows external equipment  such as  a PLC or other control system  to change the setpoint of a  loop     Both the remote analog setpoint feature and the process  variable retransmit feature can be used with PLC systems  as the link between multiloop PID control systems and  PLC systems     For example  a 0 to 5 V   dc  signal representing 0 to 300    F will be used as a remote setpoint input to the CLS200   The input signal will be received on loop 1 with the control  being performed on loop 2  Note that proper scaling resis   tors must be installed on the input of loop 1 to allow it to  accept a 0 to 5 V   dc  input     To set up this application  you would do the following     1  Intheloop1SETUP LOOP INPUT menu  set the INPUT  TYPE to LINEAR  set HI PV to 300  set LO PV to 0  set  HI RDG to 100 0  and set LO RDG to 0 0      2  Change the display to loop 2  and then enter the setup  parameters  Go to the first screen in Table 6 4     3  Follow the steps in Table 6 4 to configure the process  variable retransmit option     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 129    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 6 4 Application Example  Setting Up    Remote Setpoint       Display    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 02    RATIO CONTROL     ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        User Input    Press YES to set up the ratio control parameters for loop 2           LOO
26.  171  single loop  see single loop display  distributed zero crossing 94  158  down arrow key 53  Dual DAC  configuring outputs 186 188  dimensions 20  207  environment 207  input specifications 208  jumper settings 187  mounting 19 20  output specifications 208  process variable retransmit 113  118  specifications 207 208  wiring 43 44  dust 12  DZC  see distributed zero crossing    Watlow Anafaze 223    Index    E    earth  see ground  EDIT RAMP  amp  SOAK PROFILE  description 137  location 136  233  EDIT SEGMENT NUMBER  description 140  location 136  233  EIA TIA 232 45 46  connections 46  jumper configurations 179  jumpers in connectors 46  specifications 204  troubleshooting 174 175  see also communications  EIA TIA 485 47 49  EIA TIA 232 to 485 converter 47  49  jumper configurations 179  network connections 47 48  signal common 48  specifications 204  termination 48  troubleshooting 175  see also communications  electrostatic discharge 177  EMI  see noise  encoders 34  enhanced features option 111 132  cascade control  see cascade control  firmware code shown on display 81  menu tree 112  process variable restransmit  see process variable  retransmit  ENTER key 53  environment 12  controller 194  Dual DAC 207  power supply 205  Serial DAC 209  EPROM  checksum 81  replacing 176 178  error checking 80  ESD  see electrostatic discharge  external bridge circuit 32  EXTERNAL RESET INPUT NUMBER  description 139  location 136  233  external safety devices 9  external switchin
27.  3000    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  The controller has several available  display formats  as shown in Table 4 9  The table also  shows the maximum and minimum process variable for  each display format     Table 4 9 Display Formats                            Maximum Minimum   Display Format Process Process   Variable Variable   9999 TO  30000 30 000  9 999    999 TO  3000 3 000  999    999 9 TO  3000 0 3 000 0  999 9   99 99 TO  300 00 300 00  99 99   9 999 TO  30 000 30 000  9 999    9999 TO  3 0000 3 0000  0 9999                Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 87    Chapter 4  Setup    High Process Variable    High Reading    Low Process Variable    88    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Set a high process variable for input scaling purposes  The  high process variable and the high reading  HI RDG  to   gether define one of the points on the linear scaling func   tion   s conversion line  Set HI PV to the value you want  displayed when the signal is at the level set for the high  reading  HI RDG      LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT SCALING    HI PV   1000    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value between the low process  variable  LO PV  and the maximum process variable for the  selected display format  See Table 4 9     Enter the input signal level that corresponds to the high  process variable  HI PV  you entered in the previous pa   rameter     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT SCALING       HI RDG  100 0 FS    ALARM SETP
28.  40 0 66  15 0 25 45 0 75  20 0 33 50 0 83  25 0 41 55 0 91  30 0 50 60 1 0                      160    As a general rule  set the derivative to 15  of integral as a  starting value     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    NOTE  While the basic PID algorithm is well defined  and widely recognized  various controllers  implement it differently  Parameters may not  be taken from one controller and applied to  another with optimum results even if the  above unit conversions are performed     General PID Constants by Application    This section gives PID values for many applications  They  are useful as control values or as starting points for PID  tuning     Proportional Band Only  P     Set the proportional band to 7  of the setpoint    Example  Setpoint set to 450  proportional band set to 31      Proportional with Integral  Pl     e Set the proportional band to 10  of setpoint    Example  Setpoint set to 450  proportional band set to  45      e Set integral to 60   e   Set derivative to Off   e Set the output filter to 2     PI with Derivative  PID     e Set the proportional band to 10  of the setpoint    Example  Setpoint set to 450  proportional band set to  45      e   Set the integral to 60     e Set the derivative to 15  of the integral    Example  Integral set to 60  derivative set to 9      e Set the output filter to 2     Table 8 4 on page 162 shows general PID constants by ap   plication     Doc   0600 305
29.  7 4   Ramp Soak Single Loop Display 146  Table 7 5   Ramp Soak Control Status Symbols 147  Table 7 6   Ramp Soak Profile Modes 150    8 Tuning and Control    Table 8 1   Proportional Band Settings 159  Table 8 2   Integral Term and Reset Settings 160  Table 8 3   Derivative Term Versus Rate 160  Table 8 4   General PID Constants 162    9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Table 9 1   Controller Alarm Codes for Process and Deviation Alarms 164  Table 9 2   Operator Response to Alarms 165   Table 9 3   Failed Sensor Alarm Codes 166   Table 9 4   Hardware Error Messages 166   Table 9 5   Other Symptoms 167   Table 9 6   Resistor Values for CLS204 and CLS208 Current Inputs 181  Table 9 7   Resistor Locations for CLS204 and CLS208 Current Inputs 181  Table 9 8   Resistor Values for CLS204 and CLS208 Voltage Inputs 182  Table 9 9   Resistor Locations for CLS204 and CLS208 Voltage Inputs 182  Table 9 10   Resistor Values for CLS204 208 RTD and Thermistor Inputs 183  Table 9 11   Resistor Locations for CLS204 208 RTD and Thermistor Inputs 183  Table 9 12   Resistor Values for CLS216 Current Inputs 184   Table 9 13   Resistor Locations for CLS216 Current Inputs 185   Table 9 14   Resistor Values for CLS216 Voltage Inputs 185   Table 9 15   Resistor Locations for CLS216 Voltage Inputs 186   Table 9 16   Dual DAC Jumper Settings 187    10 Linear Scaling Examples    xiv    Table 10 1   Input Readings 190  Table 10 2   Scaling Values 190  Table 10 3   Input Readings and Calculations 19
30.  9  Safety 9   External Safety Devices 9   Power Fail Protection 10    2 Installation 11    Typical Installation 12  Mounting Controller Components 12  Recommended Tools 13  Mounting the Controller 13  Mounting the TB50 16  Mounting the Power Supply 18  Mounting the Dual DAC or Serial DAC Module 19  System Wiring 21  Wiring Recommendations 21  Noise Suppression 22  Ground Loops 24  Power Connections 25  Wiring the Power Supply 25  Connecting TB50 to CLS200 27  Testing Your System 28  TB50 or TB18 Test 28  Digital Output Test 28  Digital Input Test 29    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze    Table of Contents    Sensor Wiring 29  Input Wiring Recommendations 30  Thermocouple Connections 31  RTD Input Connections 32  Reference Voltage Terminals 32  Voltage Input Connections 32  Current Input Connections 33  Pulse Input Connections 34   Wiring Control and Digital I O 35  Output Wiring Recommendations 35  Cable Tie Wraps 35  Digital Outputs 35  Digital Inputs 38  TB18 Connections  CLS204 and CLS208 Only  40  TB50 Connections 41   Analog Outputs 43  Wiring the Dual DAC 43  Wiring the Serial DAC 44   Serial Communications 45  EIA TIA 232 Interface 45  EIA TIA 485 Interface 47  EIA TIA 485 Converters and Laptop Computers 49    3 Using the CLS200 51    Front Panel 52  Front Panel Keys 53  Displays 55  Bar Graph Display 55  Single Loop Display 57  Alarm Displays 58  System Alarms 60  Job Display 60  Changing the Setpoint 61  Selecting the Control Status 61  Manual and Automatic Contr
31.  A Serial  Motorized Control Valve 2 DAC                               Motorized    Control Serial  Valve 1 DAC      Mixture Output                      Figure 6 8 Application Using Ratio Control    To set up this application  you would do the following   1  Adjust and tune loop 1  H320  for optimal performance  before implementing the ratio setup     2  Switch the controller to display loop 2  KOH   and  then enter the three key sequence  ENTER  then ALARM  ACK  then CHNG SP   and go to the first screen in  Table 6 3     3  Follow the steps in Table 6 3 to configure ratio control     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 127    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 6 3 Application Example  Setting Up    Ratio Control                02 RATIO CONTROL  MSTR LOOP  01    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Display User Input  LOOP PROCESS UNITS  SETUP LOOP 02  RATIO CONTROL  Press YES to set up the ratio control parameters for loop 02   ALARM SETPOINT STATUS  OUT   LOOP PROCESS UNITS N    Assign loop 01 as the master loop  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  MIN SP  0 0       ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Enter the minimum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will use  0 0 gallons per second as a minimum  Press ENTER           LOOP PROCESS UNITS N    02 RATIO CONTROL  MAX SP  7 0    STATUS          ALARM SETPOINT OUT  J       Enter the maximum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will use  7  0 gallons per second as a 
32.  CONTROL PB   HEAT CONTRO TI  500 sec repeat  HEAT CONTROL TD  125 sec  HEAT CONTROL FILTER 6  COOL CONTROL PB   COOL CONTROL TI   COOL CONTROL TD  90 sec  COOL CONTROL FILTER  2       50  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting             70  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting  500 sec repeat                   Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 109    Chapter 5  Extruder Control CLS200 Series User s Guide    Extruder Control Algorithm    The Extruder Control Firmware uses a control algorithm  that has been optimized for controlling temperature loops  in plastic extruder equipment  Typically  overshoot is un   desirable and ambient cooling is not sufficient to dampen  the effects of self heating that are inherent in the extrusion  process  This control method uses both heat and cool out   puts  Under some conditions both heat and cool outputs  may be on at the same time     110 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Enhanced Features       This chapter explains five additional features for the  CLS200 controller when enabled with enhanced features  option firmware     e Process variable retransmit  e Cascade control   e Ratio control   e Remote analog setpoint   e Differential control    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 111    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                             SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP MANUAL  GLOBAL LOOP LOOP CONTROL    LOOP 
33.  Cool Output Limit Time 96  Sensor Fail Heat or Cool Output 97  Heat or Cool Thermocouple Break Output Average 97  Heat or Cool Linearity 98  Setup Loop Alarms Menu 99  High Process Alarm Setpoint 100  High Process Alarm Type 100  High Process Alarm Output Number 100  Deviation Alarm Value 100  High Deviation Alarm Type 101  High Deviation Alarm Output Number 101  Low Deviation Alarm Type 101  Low Deviation Alarm Output Number 101  Low Process Alarm Setpoint 102    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze V    Table of Contents CLS200 Series User s Guide    Low Process Alarm Type 102  Low Process Alarm Output Number 102  Alarm Deadband 102  Alarm Delay 103  Manual I O Test 103  Digital Inputs 103  Test Digital Output 104  Digital Output Number 104  Keypad Test 105  Display Test 105    5 Extruder Control 107    Setup Loop Outputs Menu 107   Cool Output Nonlinear Output Curve 107  Defaults 108  Extruder Control Algorithm 110    6 Enhanced Features 111    Process Variable Retransmit 113  Setup Loop Process Variable Retransmit Menu 113  Process Variable Retransmit Example  Data Logging 115  Cascade Control 118  Setup Loop Cascade Menu 119  Cascade Control Example  Water Tank 121  Ratio Control 124  Setup Loop Ratio Control Menu 125  Ratio Control Example  Diluting KOH 126  Remote Analog Setpoint 129  Remote Analog Setpoint Example  Setting a Setpoint with a PLC 129  Differential Control 131  Differential Control Example  Thermoforming 131    7 Ramp Soak 133    Features 134  Ramp Soak 
34.  Cool Output Type  Select the output type     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT OUTPUT       TYPE   TP    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  TP  DZC  SDAC  ON OFF  3P DZC  See  Table 4 12 for a description of the output types        NOTE  The controller assigns digital output 34 as a  clock line for the Serial DAC  You will not be  able to assign another function to output 34  if any loop   s output is set to SDAC     Table 4 12 Heat   Cool Output Types                         ee    Output Type Definition    bos Percent output converted to a percent duty   Li Time Proporioming cycle over the user selected  fi ed time base   DZC Distributed Zero Output on off state calculated for every ac line   Crossing cycle  Use with Dual DAC   SDAC Serial DAC Use with Serial DAC   ON OFF On Off Output either full on or full off    ee Use with 3 phase heaters when wired in delta   3P DZC 2 Phasa Pisirigued configu ation   For grounded Y configu ation    Zero Crossing     use DZC instead                  For an expanded description of these output types  see  Chapter 8  Tuning and Control     94 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Heat or Cool Cycle Time    SDAC Mode    SDAC Low Value    SDAC High Value    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Set the cycle time for time proportioning outputs     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT OUTPUT    CYCLE TIME  10S    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        This parameter appears only if the heat or cool outpu
35.  Doc   0600 3050 2000       Set the polarity of all digital outputs used for alarms  If LOW  is selected  if an alarm occurs the outputs sink to analog  common  If HIGH is selected  the outputs sink to common  when no alarm is active and go high when an alarm occurs     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    DIG OUT POLARITY ON    ALARM   LOW  ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT   Selectable values  HIGH or LOW     This parameter does not affect the Global Alarm output or  the Watchdog Alarm output        The display shows the controller type  firmware options   the firmware version and the EPROM checksum  Table 4 4  lists the available firmware options     Firmware Option             LOOP PROCESS    l CLS208 RS  CS ED74    V03 13    Table 4 4 Firmware Option Codes        EPROM Checksum                                  Firmware Option Description   none  Standard Firmware   EF Enhanced Features Option   RS Ramp Soak Option   EX Extruder Option  Watlow Anafaze 81    Chapter 4  Setup    NOTE     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    If the EPROM information does not match  this description  the EPROM probably con   tains a custom program  Custom programs  may not work as described in this manual  If  that is the case  contact your dealer for more    information about the firmware     Setup Loop Input Menu    82    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 01    INPUT      ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              The SETUP LOOP INPUT menu includes parameters    related to the loop input   e Input type  e   Input units    
36.  IN USE  DIGITAL OUTPUT NUMBER XX  OFF  KEYPAD TEST N A             The DIGITAL OUTPUT NUMBER screen ap     pears only if an unassigned output has been  selected in the TEST DIGITAL OUTPUT  screen     View the logic state of the eight digital inputs as H  high   meaning the input is not pulled low  or L  low  meaning the  input is connected to the controller common     Watlow Anafaze 103    Chapter 4  Setup    Test Digital Output    Digital Output Number    104    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    This screen shows the state of inputs 1 to 8 from left to  right  See Figure 4 5  Since inputs are pulled high when  they are not connected  test an input by shorting it to con   troller common and making sure this screen shows the cor   rect state for that input        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    DIGITAL INPUTS Input 8  HHHHHHH  at     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Input 1             Figure 4 5 Digital Inputs Screen    When you are done testing digital inputs  press YES or NO  to advance to the next screen  or press BACK to return to the  MANUAL I 0 TEST menu     Select one of the digital alarm outputs to test  You will test  the output on the next screen     You cannot force the state of an output enabled for control     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    TEST DIGITAL    OUTPUT  1 IN USE    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any output from 1 to 34 that is not en   abled for closed loop control or for the Serial DAC clock and  GA  the global alarm output     This screen appears on
37.  NONE          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  NONE  or any output from 1 to 34 not  enabled for closed loop control or for the Serial DAC clock     Alarm Deadband    Set an alarm deadband  This deadband value applies to the  high process  low process  high deviation and low deviation  alarms for the loop  Use the alarm deadband to avoid re   peated alarms as the process variable cycles around an  alarm value           LOOP PROCESS UNITS  01 ALARM DEAD   BAND   2       ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 255  25 5 2 55   255 or  0255   depending on the INPUT TYPE and DISP FORMAT settings     102 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Alarm Delay    Manual I O Test    Digital Inputs    Doc   0600 3050 2000    NOTE     Chapter 4  Setup    Set a loop alarm delay  This parameter delays failed sensor  and process alarms until the alarm condition has been con   tinuously present for longer than the alarm delay time     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 ALARM DELAY            0 SECONDS    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Selectable range  0 to 255 seconds     This menu facilitates testing of   e Digital inputs   e Digital outputs   e The keypad buttons       LOOP PROCESS UNITS  MANUAL 1 0  TEST      ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Table 4 14 shows the screens available in the  MANUAL 1 0 TEST menu     Table 4 14 Manual I O Test                   Parameter a  DIGITAL INPUTS HHHHHHHH  TEST DIGITAL OUTPUT  1 
38.  SETPOINT STATUS OUT              3  Press YES to set the mode  While the profile is run   ning  the only mode you will be able select is HOLD     4  Press ENTER to hold the profile     Continuing a Profile  To resume or continue a profile that is holding     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop you want  to run     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key three times  The SET  MODE parameter appears     3  PressYES to set the mode  While the profile is holding   the only mode you will be able select is cont  continue      4  Press ENTER to run the profile     150 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Responding to a Tolerance Alarm    Resetting a Profile    Doc   0600 3050 2000    A tolerance can be set for each segment  The following oc   curs when the process variable goes outside this tolerance     e The profile goes into tolerance hold   e The segment timer holds   e The loop   s single loop display shows TOHO  e The tolerance alarm timer starts    If the process variable returns within the segment toler   ance before the tolerance alarm time elapses  the profile re   turns to RUN mode and the tolerance alarm timer resets     The following occurs if the profile remains out of tolerance  for longer than the tolerance alarm time     e The controller displays the single loop display with the  tolerance alarm  a flashing T     e The global alarm output turns on  Press ALARM ACK to    e Turn off the global alarm output  
39.  The EPROM  is a 32 pin socketed chip that is labeled with the mod   el  version and checksum     EPROM Detail        U2 EPROM MP  QLLLELILE     AM            Notch    Figure 9 3 EPROM Location                                                       7  Remove the existing EPROM from its socket with an  IC extraction tool or a jeweler   s flathead screwdriver           Figure 9 4 Remove EPROM          8  Carefully insert the new EPROM into the EPROM  socket  Make sure that the chip is oriented so that its  notch fits in the corresponding corner of the socket     9  Reverse steps 2 through 4 to reassemble the unit   10  Power up the controller     11  Re enter parameters     178 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Changing Communications    To switch between EIA TIA 232 and EIA TIA 485  change  the jumpers as shown in Figure 9 5                                         JU1  ea e e qe ep a  JU2  eb 4 o epg ep a  JU3  e 4 o epa ope  JU4  ea e opd opb g  JU5  Ba e ep d e p a  A B A B A B   Configured for Configured for Last controller in   EIA TIA 232 EIA TIA 485 system configured   for EIA TIA 485    Figure 9 5 Jumper Configurations    You will need tweezers and a Phillips head screwdriver to  switch between EIA TIA 232 and EIA TIA 485  Follow  these steps     1  Power down the unit     2  Remove the controllers metal casing  See Replacing  the EPROM on page 176 for step by step instructions     Find jumper
40.  and loop alarm delay     If you have enabled the remote job select function  see Job  Select Digital Inputs on page 76   you will not be able to  load a job  If you try  you will see this message        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    CANNOT LOAD JOB    REMOTE SELECT ON    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Save the job information for every loop to one of eight jobs  in the battery backed RAM    LOOP  PROCESS UNITS   SAVE SETUP   TO JOB  1    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Selectable values  1 to 8    If you have enabled the remote job select function  see Job  Select Digital Inputs on page 76   you will not be able to  save a job  If you try  you will see this message     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    CANNOT SAVE JOB       REMOTE SELECT ON          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Watlow Anafaze 75    Chapter 4  Setup    Job Select Digital Inputs    76    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Set the number of job select inputs  The controller uses  these inputs as a binary code that specifies the job number  to run  The number of inputs you choose in this parameter  controls the number of jobs you can select remotely     If you select NONE  digital inputs do not affect job selection   Jobs may be loaded and saved using the LOAD SETUP FROM  JOB and SAVE SETUP TO JOB parameters        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  JOB SELECT  DIG INPUTS  NONE    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  1  2 or 3 inputs  or NONE  These choices  have the following effect     Table 4 2 Job Select Inp
41.  and may be used as feedback for control loops  It also  accepts digital  TTL  inputs which may be used to trigger  certain firmware features     Table 11 11 Analog Inputs       Parameter    Description       Number of Control Loops    CLS204  5  CLS208  9  CLS216  17       Number of Analog Inputs    CLS204  4 with full range of input types  plus one pulse  CLS208  8 with full range of input types  plus one pulse  CLS216  16 with full range of input types  plus one pulse       Input Switching    CLS204 and CLS208  Differential solid state multiplexer  CLS216  Single ended  solid state multiplexer       Input Sampling Rate    CLS204  6 Hz  167 ms  at 60 Hz  5 Hz  200 ms  at 50 Hz   CLS208  3 Hz  333 ms  at 60 Hz  2 5 Hz  400 ms  at 50 Hz   CLS216 1 5 Hz  667 ms  at 60 Hz  1 25 Hz  800 ms  at 50 Hz       Analog Over Voltage Protection     20V referenced to digital ground        Maximum Common Mode Voltage    5V input to input or input to analog common  CLS204 and CLS208        Common Mode  Rejection  CMR     For inputs that do not exceed  5V   gt 60 dB dc to 1 kHz  and  120 dB at selected line frequency        A D Converter    Integrates voltage to frequency                   Input Range  10 to  60mYV  or 0 to 25V with scaling resistors  Resolution 0 006   greater than 14 bits  internal    0 03  of full scale  60mV  at 25   C  Accuracy   0 08  of full scale  60mV  at 0 to 50   C  Calibration Automatic zero and full scale          DC Common to Frame Ground  Maximum Potential    
42.  as the Serial DAC     TB50 or TB18 Dual DAC           5V   dc   5V CTRL Supply  Control Output DZC CTRL PID Output     12 24V    dc  External  Power Supply   V   dc  Load Connection             mA Load        mA   dc  Load Connection        External Power  Supply  V   dc  Load  Connection       12 to 24V   dc  Power Supply    Figure 2 28 Dual DAC with Current Output    Watlow Anafaze 43    Chapter 2  Installation    Wiring the Serial DAC    44    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                              TB50 or TB18 Dual DAC   5V   dc  1 1  5V    dc  CTRL  PID Loop Output 2 DZC CTRL PID Output  3  12 24V   dc  Exter   nal Power Supply  V   dc  Load   4  V  dc  Load Conn   il 5  mA   dc  Load Conn   6  External Power  Supply  V   dc  Load  Conn          12 to 24V   dc  Power Supply             Figure 2 29 Dual DAC with Voltage Output    The Serial DAC provides a robust analog output signal   The module converts the proprietary Serial DAC signal  from the controller   s open collector output in conjunction  with the clock signal to an analog current or voltage  See  Figure 2 30 for wiring  The Serial DAC is user configurable  for voltage or current output through firmware configura   tion  See Configuring Serial DAC Outputs on page 188   The Serial DAC optically isolates the controller   s control  output from the load  When a single Serial DAC is used  it  may be powered by the 5V   dc  found on the TB50  or by  an external supply referenced to the controller 
43.  circuit must be  modified  When configured for thermocouple inputs  0 Q re   sistors are installed in all RC locations  To accommodate  milliamp current signals or voltage signals outside the  standard range  resistors are added or replaced to scale the  signals to the standard range  These resistors can be in   stalled by Watlow Anafaze or by a qualified electronics  technician using scaling resistors supplied by Watlow  Anafaze     Figure 9 7 shows the schematic for one single ended sensor  input to the CLS216  See CLS216 Current Inputs on page  184 and CLS216 Voltage Inputs on page 185 for specific in   structions and resistor values for voltage and current in   puts      Voltage only  To CLS200  IN   Measurement  eae RC Circuitry  npu  Terminals RD  Voltage and Current   Com e       Figure 9 7 CLS216 Input Circuit    For each current input on a CLS216 controller  you must   install one resistor  The value of the resistor must be cor    rect for the expected input range  Install the resistor in the  listed resistor location     Table 9 12 Resistor Values for CLS216 Cur   rent Inputs             Input Range Resistor Value RD  O to 10 mA 6 0Q  0 to 20 mA 3 00                Resistor tolerance   0 1     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring                                              Table 9 13 Resistor Locations for CLS216  Current Inputs  Resistor Resistor  Loop Location Loop Location  RD RD  1 R
44.  communications cable  DB 9 female bare wire    Serial Communications Jumper Settings  0   EIA TIA 232   1   EIA TIA 485   2   EIA TIA 485 terminated    Special Inputs  one or two digits     Standard unit is conf gured for thermocouples and  10 to 60mV linear inputs    For other sensors  special inputs are required    00   Thermocouples and  10 to 60mV inputs only   XX   Number of current and voltage inputs  RTDs are not available on the CLS216  Include  leading zero as needed                                         Figure 1 1 CLS200 Part Numbering    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 5    Chapter 1  System Overview CLS200 Series User s Guide       If special inputs are ordered in the  controller part number  the following  is specified in the pa t description     Special Input Type  Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs   20   RTD1  0 1     100 0 to 275 0   C   148 0 to 572 0   F   Not available on CLS216   21   RTD2  1     120 0 to 840 0   C   184 0 to 1544 0   F   Not available on CLS216   43   0 to 10 mA   dc    44   0 to 20mA   dc  4 to 20mA   dc    50   0 to 100mV   dc    52   0 to 500mV   dc    53   0 to 1V   dc    55   0 to 5V   dc    56   0 to 10V   dc    57   0 to 12V   dc    Start Channel  XX   Channel number XX  End Channel  XX   Channel number XX    Note   Make sure the number of special inputs specif ed is equal to  the number of special inputs in the controller part number     Uninstalled kits are available                    Figure 1 2 CLS200 Special I
45.  compatibilit     lectromagn  tique    EN 61326  1995 Appareillage   lectrique pour la mesure  la commande  et l   usage de laboratoire     Prescriptions relatives     la Compatilit   Electro Magn  tique  Classe A    EN 61000 3 2   1995 Limites d   mission de courant harmon ique   EN 61000 3 3   1995 Limites de fluctuation de tension   EN 61000 4 2   1995 D  charge   lectrostatique   EN 61000 4 3  1997 Insensibilit      l   nergie rayonn  e   EN 61000 4 4   1995 Courants   lectriques transitoires rapides   EN 61000 4 5   1995 Insensibi lit   aux surtensions   EN 61000 4 6  1996 Insensibilit      l   nergie par conduction   EN 61000 4 11   1994 Insensibilit   aux chutes subites  aux courtes  interruptions et aux variations de tension   ENV 50204   1995 T  l  phone cellulaire    30590 00 REV E       Erkl  rt  da   das folgende Produkt    Beschreibung  Serie CLS200   Modellnummer n   2  04  08 oder 16     1  2  3 oder 4   0 1 oder 2    0 1 oder 2   0 1 2 oder 3   0 1 2 oder 3   0 1 oder 2    1 oder 2 Buchstabe oder Ziffern     Deutsch    Klassifikation  Installationskategorie II  Emissionsgrad IlI  Nennspannung  15 bis 24 Vde   Nominaler   Stromverbrauch  max  610 mA    Erf  llt die wichtigsten Normen der folgenden Anweisung en  der Europ  ischen Union  unter Verwendung des wichtigsten Abschnitts bzw  der wichtigsten Abschnitte der  normalisierten Spezifikationen und der untenstehenden einschlagigen Dokumente     89 336 EEC Elektromagnetische Ubereinstimmungsanw_    amp     EN 6
46.  describes how to wire and configure the control  outputs for the CLS200 series controller     NOTE  Control outputs are connected to the  CLS200   s common when the control output  is on  low   Be careful when you connect ex   ternal devices that may have a low side ata  voltage other than controller ground  since  you may create ground loops     If you expect grounding problems  use isolat   ed solid state relays and isolate the control  device inputs     The CLS200 provides dual PID control outputs for each  loop  These outputs can be enabled or disabled  and are  connected via TB50 or TB18     Output Wiring Recommendations    When wiring output devices  use multicolored  stranded   shielded cable for analog outputs and digital outputs con   nected to panel mounted solid state relays     e Analog outputs usually use a twisted pair     e Digital outputs usually have 9 to 20 conductors  de   pending on wiring technique     Cable Tie Wraps    Once you have wired outputs to the TB50  install the cable  tie wraps to reduce strain on the connectors     Each row of terminals has a cable tie wrap hole at one end   Thread the cable tie wrap through the cable tie wrap hole   Then wrap the cable tie wrap around the wires attached to  that terminal block     Digital Outputs    The CLS200 series provides dual control outputs for up to  16 loops  The controller   s default configuration has all heat  outputs enabled and all cool outputs disabled  Disabling a  heat output makes that outp
47.  from one to 1 000  microns  These wavelengths are most suited  for radiant heating and infrared  noncontact   temperature sensing     Input  Process variable information that is supplied  to the instrument     Input Scaling   The ability to scale input readings  readings in  percent of full scale  to the engineering units of  the process variable     Input Type  The signal type that is connected to an input   such as thermocouple  RTD  linear or process     Integral Control  I    Control action that automatically eliminates  offset  or droop  between setpoint and actual  process temperature     J    Job   A set of operating conditions for a process that  can be stored and recalled in a controller   s  memory  also called a recipe     Junction  The point where two dissimilar metal conduc   tors join to form a thermocouple     L    Lag   The delay between the output of a signal and  the response of the instrument to which the  signal is sent     Linear Input    A process input that represents a straight line  function     Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Linearity   The deviation in response from an expected or  theoretical straight line value for instruments  and transducers  also called linearity error     Liquid Crystal Display  LCD    A type of digital display made of a material  that changes reflectance or transmittance  when an electrical field is applied to it     Load   The electrical demand of a process  expressed  in power  watts   current  amp
48.  installation 28  to power encoders 34  troubleshooting 173    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    TD  see derivative  temperature  incorrect on display 167  171  operating 194  205  207  209  storage 194  205  207  209  terminal specifications  controller 196  TB50 197  TEST DIGITAL OUTPUT  default value 103  description 104  location 73  233  testing  TB18 after installation 28  TB50 after installation 28  see also troubleshooting  thermistor inputs  scaling resistors for 183  Thermocouple Short Alarm parameter 66  thermocouples  accuracy 201  ground loops 31  manual mode if break occurs 97  offset 84  polarity checking 85  range 201  resolution 201  reversed detection 85  short detection 79  troubleshooting 171  types supported 83  wiring 31 32  thermoforming example 131  three key sequence 71  TI  see integral  tie wraps 35  TIM REM  147  time proportioning 94  cycle time 95  description 157  TOHO 151  torque  see terminal specifications  triggers  ramp soak 142  troubleshooting 163 176  alarms 164  166  all loops are set to manual 0  167  AMBIENT WARNING 168  check these things first 163  communications 174 176  control outputs 172 173    control status switches unexpectedly 167    digital inputs 29  103  173  digital outputs 28  104  173  display does not work 167  grounding problems 172  175  H W AMBIENT FAILURE 169  H W GAIN FAILURE 170  H W OFFSET FAILURE 170  keypad 105  167  170   LOW POWER 168    Index    tolerance alarms 151  unexpected behavi
49.  minutes  or  MINS SECS  minutes seconds      Setup Ramp Soak Profile Menu    The SETUP RAMP SOAK PROFILE menu is located be   tween the SETUP LOOP ALARMS and the MANUAL 1 0  TEST menus if the ramp soak option is installed        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP RAMP SOAK  PROFILE     ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Press YES to set up or edit ramp soak profiles     Edit Ramp Soak Profile    Choose a profile to set up or edit        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    EDIT RAMP  amp  SOAK    PROFILE  A    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  A to Q  17 profiles         Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 137    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Copy Setup From Profile    Tolerance Alarm Time    Ready Segment Setpoint    138    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Set up similar profiles quickly by copying the setup of an  existing profile     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    COPY SETUP    FROM PROFILE   Q    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  A to Q     Set a limit on how long the process variable can be outside  the tolerance set for the segment before the tolerance  alarm occurs     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A OUT OF TOLRNCE    ALARM TIME  1 00    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        If the process variable does not return within the tolerance   the tolerance alarm will recur after the tolerance alarm  time elapses again     If the alarm persists  you may want to reset the profile     Selectable values  0 00 to 99 59  minutes or hours  de   pending on the time base setting      When yo
50.  process  through the controller to ground  This can cause instru   ment errors or malfunctions     A ground loop may follow one of these paths  among others   e From one sensor to another    e From a sensor to the communications port    e From a sensor to the dc power supply     The best way to avoid ground loops is to minimize unneces   sary connections to ground  Do not connect any of the fol   lowing terminals to each other or to earth ground     e Power supply de common   e TB1  terminals 5  6  11  12  analog common    e TB1  terminal 17  reference voltage common    e TB1  terminals 23  24  communications common   e TB2  terminal 2  dc power common     Special Precautions for the CLS216    The CLS216 has single ended inputs  All the negative sen   sor leads are tied to the analog common  That means there  is no sensor to sensor isolation  Proper grounding is critical  for this unit  Take these additional precautions with a  CLS216     e Use all ungrounded or all well grounded thermocou   ples  not a mix     e If using a mixture of thermocouples or low voltage in   puts   lt 500 mV  and current inputs  connect the nega   tive leads of the current transmitters to terminal 17   Ref Com  on TB1     e If using voltage transmitters  use only sourcing mod   els or configuration  Sinking configurations will not  work     e Isolate the controller   s communication port  if used  by  using an optically isolated 232 to 485 converter     Personal Computers and Ground Loops    24    
51.  process variable causes a decrease in the  output  Heating applications usually use  reverse action     RTD  See Resistance Temperature Detector     S    Serial Communications   A method of transmitting information between  devices by sending all bits serially over a sin   gle communication channel     EIA TIA 232   An Electronics Industries of  America  EIA  standard for interface between  data terminal equipment and data communi   cations equipment for serial binary data inter   change  This is usually for communications  over a short distance  50 feet  15 m  or less   and to a single device     EIA TIA 485   An Electronics Industries of  America  EIA  standard for electrical charac   teristics of generators and receivers for use in  balanced digital multipoint systems  This is  usually used to communicate with multiple  devices over a common cable or where dis   tances over 50 feet  15 m  are required     Setpoint  SP    The desired value programmed into a control   ler  For example  the temperature at which a  system is to be maintained     Shield   A metallic foil or braided wire layer surround   ing conductors that is designed to prevent elec   trostatic or electromagnetic interference from  external sources     Signal  Any electrical transmittance that conveys    information     Solid State Relay  SSR   See Relay  Solid State     Span  The difference between the lower and upper    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Glossary    limits of a range expressed in the same units  as th
52.  profile   then copy it and alter it to set up the rest    External reset  Select a digital input you can use to  hold a profile in the    start    state and restart it     Table 7 1 summarizes the ramp soak features of the  CLS200     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Table 7 1  Ramp Soak Specifications                               Number of possible profile 17  Number of times to repeat a profil   to 99 S  Continuous  Number of segments per profil 1 to 20  Number of triggers per segment Up to 2  On   Type of triggers On Latched  Off  Off Latched  Number of possible inputs for triggers 8  Number of events per segment Up to 4  Number of possible outputs for events   At least one of these outputs must be 34  used for control     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 135    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Ramp Soak Menus    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The SETUP R S PROFILES menu appears between the  SETUP LOOP ALARMS and MANUAL I 0 TEST menus  Fig   ure 7 2 shows the ramp soak setup menu tree                                                           SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP MANUAL  GLOBAL LOOP LOOP CONTROL LOOP PV LOOP LOOP RAMP SOAK    1 0  PARAMETERS INPUTS   PARAMETERS RETRANSMIT     OUTPUTS ALARMS PROFILE TEST  YES    J YES  RAMP SOAK T          136          ME BASE            EDIT RAMP  amp  SOAK  PROFILE           COPY SETUP FROM  PROFILE           OUT OF TOLRNCE  ALARM TIME           READY SEGMENT  SETPO
53.  provides three linear scaling examples  The  examples describe     e A pressure sensor generating a 4 to 20 mA signal  e A flow sensor generating a 0 to 5V signal    e A pulse encoder generating 900 pulses per inch of  movement    Example 1  A 4 to 20 mA Sensor    Situation  A pressure sensor that generates a 4 to 20 mA signal is con   nected to the controller  The specifications of the sensor  state it generates 4 mA at 0 0 pounds per square inch  PSI   and 20 mA at 50 0 PSI    Setup    The sensor is connected to a loop input set up with a resis   tor scaling network producing 60mV at 20 mA     The INPUT TYPE for the loop is set to LINEAR  The sensor  measures PSI in tenths  so the DISP FORMAT is set to   999 9 TO  3000 0     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 189    Chapter 10  Linear Scaling Examples    190    CLS200 Series User   s Guide          Table 10 1 Input Readings  Process r    Sensor Reading  Percent of  Bigplaved Input Full Scale   FS   50 0 PSI 20 mA 100 FS  0 0 PSI 4mA   100  x  4 mA 20 mA    20 FS                   The scaling values setup in the SETUP LOOP INPUT menu    are shown in Table 10 2      Table 10 2 Scaling Values                      Parameter Prompt Value  High Process Variable HIGH PV 50 0 PSI  High Sensor Reading HIGH RDG 100 0 FS  Low Process Variable LO PV 0 0 PSI  Low Sensor Reading LO RDG 20 0 FS                Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide Chapter 10  Linear Scaling Examples    Example 2  A 0 to 5
54.  referenced to one another  the con   troller   s outputs will not be able to switch the  loads     When making screw terminal connections     tighten to 4 5 to 5 4 inch pound  0 5 to 0 6  Nm      Without proper grounding  the CLS200 may    not operate properly or may be damaged     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    A    CAUTION  To prevent damage from incorrect connec   tions  do not turn on the ac power before test   ing the connections as explained in Testing  Your System on page 28     NOTE  Do not connect the controller   s dc common     COM  to earth ground 7  Doing so will de   feat the noise protection circuitry  making  measurements less stable                                                                                                           Power Supply   V1 ey  bie  Add jumper   y o N  PGT SM              CLS200    mD   V2   15V    SSR SSR    s p     O     COM  15v COM SSR SSB                 o      V2   15V  e e  e  7    Ground   e i    5 3   Serial DAC  ACL  AC Line  tC  e 570  ACN  AC Neutral  M  e                                                          N white  120 240  V   ac  A black  Supply green  77   D            If using 5V   dc  for outputs  jumper 5V common to 15V common   Connect terminals to ac panel ground     Figure 2 14 Power Connections with the  CLS200 Power Supply    Connecting TB50 to CLS200    1  Connect the SCSI cable to the controller   2  Connect the SCSI cable to the TB50  
55.  system  there is no way to recover  your original parameters  If you have a computer super   vised system with AnaWin or Anasoft  a copy of your pa   rameters can be saved to a job file     Replacing the EPROM    176    Replacing the EPROM involves minor mechanical disas   sembly and reassembly of the controller  You will need a  Phillips screwdriver and a small flathead screwdriver     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    A    CAUTION  The EPROM and other components are sen   sitive to damage from electrostatic discharge   ESD   To prevent ESD damage  use an ESD  wrist strap or other antistatic device     NOTE  Replacing the EPROM with another version  results in full erasure of RAM  Make a record  of all parameters before changing the  EPROM     Make a record of system parameters   Power down the controller     Remove the four screws from the sides of the controller  front panel     4  Remove the electronics assembly from the case  as  shown in Figure 9 1        Figure 9 1 Removal of Electronics Assembly  from Case    5  Unscrew the four screws at the corners of the top  board and carefully unplug this board to access the  bottom board  processor board   Figure 9 2 shows the  screws to remove     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 177    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide       Figure 9 2 Screws Locations on PC Board    6  Locate the EPROM on the circuit board 
56.  the HEAT parameter     Selectable values  Any loop or NONE     Minimum Input    Enter the lowest value of the process variable to be retrans   mitted  This value is expressed in the same engineering  units as the input loop     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS  MIN INP  1000    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        If the process variable falls below the minimum  the output  will stay at the minimum value     Selectable values  Any value in the input loop   s range     Minimum Output    Enter the output value  0 to 100   that corresponds to the  minimum input     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS       MIN OUT   0     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  0 to 100     If you select a minimum output value other than 0   the  output will never drop below MIN OUT  even if the process  variable drops below the MIN INP that you specified     Maximum Input    Enter the highest value of the process variable to be re   transmitted  This value is expressed in the same engineer   ing units as the input loop        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS  MAX INP  10000    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Ifthe process variable goes above the maximum  the output  will stay at the maximum value     Selectable values  Any value in the input loop   s range     114 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Maximum Output    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    By adjusting the maximum and minimum inputs  you can  scale the output appropri
57.  the SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT or SENSOR FAIL CL  OUTPUT parameter in the SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    PROCESS POWER    DIGIN   NONE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  1 to 8  or NONE     Set the communications address for the controller  On an  EIA TIA 485 communication loop  each controller must  have a unique address  Begin with address 1 for the first  controller and assign each subsequent controller the next  higher address        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    CONTROLLER       ADDRESS   1    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  1 to 247  When using one controller  with Anasoft  select address 1  When using multiple con   trollers with Anasoft  use consecutive addresses from 1 to  16 only     Watlow Anafaze 79    Chapter 4  Setup    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Communications Baud Rate    Communications Protocol    NOTE     Set the communications baud rate     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    COMMUNICATIONS       BAUD RATE   9600    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  9600  2400 or 19200     Set the baud rate to the same speed in both    the controller and the HMI software or panel     Set the communications protocol  Choose the correct proto   col for the software or device with which the controller will  communicate  You must switch power to the controller off    then back on  to make a change to this parameter take ef    fect     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    COMMUNICATIONS    PROTOCOL   ANA    ALARM _ SETPOINT STA
58.  them in a panel with CLS200 series equip   ment  use a 0 01 microfarad capacitor rated at  1000V   ac   or higher  in series with a 47 Q  0 5 watt  resistor across the N O  contacts of the relay load  This  is known as a snubber network and can reduce the  amount of electrical noise     You can use other voltage suppression devices  but  they are not usually required  For instance  you can  place a metal oxide varistor  MOV  rated at 130V  for  120V   ac  control circuits across the load  which lim   its the peak ac voltage to about 180V   ac   Watlow  Anafaze part number 26 130210 00   You can also  place a transorb  back to back zener diodes  across the  digital output  which limits the digital output voltage     Additional Recommendations for a Noise Immune System  It is strongly recommended that you     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Isolate outputs through solid state relays  where pos   sible     Isolate RTDs or    bridge    type inputs from ground     Isolate digital inputs from ground through solid state  relays  If this is not possible  then make sure the digi   tal input is the only connection to earth ground other  than the chassis ground    If you are using EIA TIA 232 from a non isolated host   either  1  do not connect any other power common  point to earth ground  or  2  use an optical isolator in  the communications line     Watlow Anafaze 23    Chapter 2  Installation    Ground Loops    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Ground loops occur when current passes from the
59.  to apply to the master loop   s process  variable        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  CTRL RATIO  1 0    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  0 1 to 999 9     Enter the value to add or subtract from the ratio loop set   point calculation before using it as the setpoint  This value  is expressed in the same engineering units as the ratio  loop   s process variable        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  02 RATIO CONTROL  SP DIFF  0    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values   9999 to 9999 with the decimal  placement determined by the DISP FORMAT setting for the  ratio loop              Ratio Control Example  Diluting KOH    126    A chemical process requires a formula of two parts water   H20  to one part potassium hydroxide  KOH  to produce  diluted potassium hydroxide  The desired flow of H30 is 10  gallons per second  gps   so the KOH should flow at 5 gps   Separate pipes for each chemical feed a common pipe  The  flow rate of each feeder pipe is measured by a CLS200  with  H30 flow as process variable 1 and KOH flow as process  variable 2  The outputs of loops 1 and 2 adjust motorized  valves     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 6  Enhanced Features                                              Water Input     KOH Input Loop 1  Water Flow Control Loop  Loop 2  KOH Flow Control Loop  Loop 1 Input  Flow Process Variable Loop 1 PID Output  Transducer  Loop 2 Input   CLS200  Process Variable Loop 2 PID Output 
60.  use a  switching device with the appropriate impedances in the on  and off states and do not connect the inputs to external  power sources     When off  the swiching device must provide an impedance  of at least 11 kQ to ensure that the voltage will rise to  greater than 3 7V   dc   When on  the switch must provide  not more than 1 KQ impedance to ensure the voltage drops  below 1 3V   do      To install a switch as a digital input  connect one lead to the  common terminal on the TB50  terminals 3 and 4  or TB18   terminal 2   Connect the other lead to the desired digital  input terminal on the TB50  terminals 43 to 50  or TB18   terminals 16 to 18      Functions Activated by Digital Inputs    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Use digital inputs to activate the following functions     e Load a job that is stored in controller memory  See Job  Select Digital Inputs on page 76    e Change all loops to manual mode at specified output  levels  See Output Override Digital Input on page 77    e Enable thermocouple short detection  See Process  Power Digital Input on page 79    e Restore control automatically after a failed sensor has  been repaired  See Restore PID Digital Input on page 92        External  TB50 A Switching     Input Pa Device    Control Com                Figure 2 27 Wiring Digital Inputs    Watlow Anafaze 39    Chapter 2  Installation    TB18 Connections  CLS204 and CLS208 Only     CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                                
61.  with three functions  Proportional  action dampens the system response  integral  corrects for droops  and derivative prevents  overshoot and undershoot     Polarity   The electrical quality of having two opposite  poles  one positive and one negative  Polarity  determines the direction in which a current  tends to flow     Process Variable  PV    The parameter that is controlled or measured   Typical examples are temperature  relative  humidity  pressure  flow  fluid level  events  etc   The high process variable is the highest value  of the process range  expressed in engineering  units  The low process variable is the lowest  value of the process range     Proportional  P    Output effort proportional to the error from  setpoint  For example  if the proportional band  is 20   and the process is 10   below the setpoint   the heat proportioned effort is 50   The lower  the PB value  the higher the gain     Proportional Band  PB    A range in which the proportioning function of  the control is active  Expressed in units   degrees or percent of span  See also PID     Proportional Control  A control using only the P  proportional  value  of PID control     Pulse Input  Digital pulse signals from devices  such as  optical encoders     218 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    R    Ramp  A programmed increase in the temperature of  a setpoint system     Range   The area between two limits in which a quan   tity or value is measured  It is usually  described in terms 
62. 0   F   212 to  760   C        K T C  450 to  2 500   F   268 to  1 371   C        T T C  450 to  750   F   268 to  399   C        S T C 0 to  3 200   F   18 to  1 760   C        R T C 0 to  3 210   F   18 to  1 766   C        B T C  150 to 3 200   F   66 to 1 760   C        E T C  150 to 3 200   F   66 to 1 760   C        RTD1  148 0 to  572 0   F   100 0 to  275 0   C        RTD2  184 to  1 544   F   120 to  840   C        PULSE 0 to 2 kHz       SKIP Loop not used           LINEAR   See Linear Scaling Parameters on page 86           Watlow Anafaze 83    Chapter 4  Setup    Loop Name    Input Units    Input Reading Offset    84    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Assign a two character name to the loop  This name is shown  on the single loop display in place of the loop number     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 LOOP       NAME   01          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 9  A to Z            degree symbol      For loops with temperature sensor input types  choose a  temperature scale  Fahrenheit or Celsius  For a linear or  pulse loop  choose a three character description of the  loop   s engineering units        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT    UNITS     F    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  The table below shows the character  set for input units     Table 4 7 Input Character Sets             Input Character Sets for Units  Thermocouple o o  or RTD KOR  Linear or Pulse 0 to 9  A to Z           space                If the input type 
63. 0 2000 Watlow Anafaze 161       Chapter 8  Tuning and Control CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 8 4 General PID Constants                   TEP Proportional een   Output   Cycle       Application Band Integral   Derivative Filter Type Time Action  Electrical heat  with solid state 50   60 15 4 DZC   Reverse  relays  Electrical heat  with electrome  50   60 15 6 TP 20 Reverse  chanical relays  Cool witiisele 70   500 90 4 TP 10   Direct  noid valve  Cool with fans 10   Off 10 4 TP 10 Direct  Electric heat  with open heat 30   20 Off 4 DZC   Reverse  coils  Gas heat with 60   120 25  motorized  valves 8 Analog   Reverse  Setpoint gt 1200 100   240 40                               162 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    When There is a Problem    Doc   0600 3050 2000    NOTE     A    CAUTION     The controller is only one part of your control system  Of   ten  what appears to be a problem with the controller is re   ally a problem with other equipment  so check these things  first     e Controller is installed correctly   See Chapter 2  In   stallation for help      e Sensors  such as thermocouples and RTDs  are in   stalled correctly and working     If you suspect your controller has been dam     aged  do not attempt to repair it yourself  or  you may void the warranty     If the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter do not  solve your system   s problems  call Application Engineering  for additional troubleshooting help  If y
64. 0 to 3199   180   1000 to 1099   70 2100 to 2199   130 3200 to 3299   185             Doc   0600 3050 2000    As a general rule  set the proportional band to 10  of the  setpoint below 1000   and 5  of the setpoint above 1000      This setting is useful as a starting value     Watlow Anafaze 159    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    Integral Settings    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The controller   s integral parameter  TI  is set in seconds  per repeat  Some other products use an integral term called  reset  in units of repeats per minute  Table 8 2 shows inte   gral settings versus reset settings     Table 8 2 Integral Term and Reset Settings                                  Integral Reset Integral Reset   Seconds Repeat   Repeats Minute   Seconds Repeat   Repeats Minute   30 2 0 210 0 28  45 1 3 240 0 25  60 1 0 270 0 22  90 0 66 300 0 20  120 0 50 400 0 15  150 0 40 500 0 12  180 0 33 600 0 10                   Derivative Settings    As a general rule  use 60  120  180 or 240 as a starting val   ue for the integral     The controller   s derivative parameter  TD  is programmed  in seconds  Some other products use a derivative term  called rate programmed in minutes  Use the table or the  formula to convert parameters from one form to the other   Table 8 3 shows derivative versus rate  Rate   Derivative   60     Table 8 3 Derivative Term Versus Rate                            Derivative Rate Derivative Rate   seconds   minutes   seconds   minutes   5 0 08 35 0 58  10 0 16
65. 00 3050 2000    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    range of 23 to 32   F or 122 to 131   F   5 to 0   C or 50 to  55   C   The operating limits are 32 to 122   F  0 to 50   C      If the controller displays AW in the lower left corner of the  display     1   2     Acknowledge the alarm     If the error message remains  check the ambient air  temperature near the controller  Adjust ventilation   cooling or heating to ensure that the temperature  around the controller is 32 to 122   F  0 to 50   C   If the  unit is functioning correctly  the error will clear when  the ambient temperature is within range and the  alarm has been acknowledged     If the ambient temperature is within range and the er   ror persists     a  Turn the power to the controller off     b  Remove the boards from the CLS200 housing   See Replacing the EPROM on page 176     c  Reseat the boards and turn the power on     If the error persists  make a record of the settings then  perform a NO key reset  See NO Key Reset on page 176     If the error is not cleared  contact your supplier for fur   ther troubleshooting guidelines  See Returning Your  Unit on page 164     The hardware ambient failure alarm indicates that the am   bient sensor in the CLS200 is reporting that the tempera   ture around the controller is outside of the acceptable  range of 0 to 50   C  This error can also occur when there is  a hardware failure     If the controller displays H W AMBIENT FAILURE     1   2     Acknowledge th
66. 00 Series User s Guide    Mounting with Standoffs    1  Remove the DIN rail mounting brackets from the  TB50     2  Select a location with enough clearance to remove the  TB50  its SCSI cable and the controller itself     Mark the four mounting holes     4  Drill and tap four mounting holes for  6  3 5 mm   screws or bolts     5  Mount the TB50 with four screws     There are four smaller holes on the terminal board  Use  these holes to secure wiring to the terminal block with tie  wraps         4 holes for  3 4 in  6  3 5 mm    86 mm  screws or bolts       A ax 0 2 in  0 2 in 3 6 in ey    5 mm   91 mm     Figure 2 9 Mounting a TB50 with Standoffs          Mounting the Power Supply    If you use your own power supply for the CLS200  refer to  the power supply manufacturer   s instructions for mounting  information  Choose a Class 2 power supply that supplies   an isolated regulated 12 to 24V   dc  at 1 A     18 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    Mounting Environment    Leave enough clearance around the power supply so that it  can be removed     Mounting the Dual DAC or Serial DAC Module    This section describes how to install the optional Dual DAC  and Serial DAC digital to analog converters     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 19    Chapter 2  Installation    Installation    Jumpers    Mounting    Dual DAC    4 holes for  8  4 0 mm   screws or bolts          000000           3 62 in Electrical   91 mm  connections
67. 050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Changing the Setpoint    Select the single loop display for the loop you want to  change  Press CHNG SP  This display appears     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SETPOINT      25  F    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        e Press YES to change the setpoint     Press the up or down keys  YES or NO  to increase or de   crease the setpoint value     e Press ENTER to save your changes and return to single  loop display     r   Press NO or BACK  without pressing ENTER  to return to  single loop display without saving the new setpoint     Selecting the Control Status    If you set the control status to AUTO  the controller auto   matically controls the process according to the configura   tion information you give it    If you set the control status to MAN  you need to set the out   put level    If you set the control status to TUNE  the controller performs  an autotune and chooses PID parameters     NOTE  If the loop outputs are disabled  you cannot  toggle between manual and automatic con   trol  If you try it  the screen shows an error  message telling you that the outputs are dis   abled  as shown below  Use the SETUP  LOOPS OUTPUT menu to enable the outputs   See Setup Loop Outputs Menu on page 93     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    MAN AUTO CONTROL       OUTPUTS DISABLED          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Manual and Automatic Control  1  Switch to the single loop display for the loop   2  Press MAN AUTO     3  Press YE
68. 1  Table 10 4   Scaling Values 191  Table 10 5   Scaling Values 192    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide List of Tables    11 Specifications    Table 11 1   Agency Approvals   Compliance 193   Table 11 2   Environmental Specifications 194   Table 11 3   Physical Dimensions 194   Table 11 4   Processor with Straight SCSI 195   Table 11 5   Processor with Right Angle SCSI 195   Table 11 6   Processor Connections 196   Table 11 7   TB50 Physical Dimensions 196   Table 11 8   TB50 Connections 197   Table 11 9   TB50 with Straight SCSI 198   Table 11 10   TB50 with Right Angle SCSI 199   Table 11 11   Analog Inputs 200   Table 11 12   Pulse Inputs 201   Table 11 13   Thermocouple Range and Resolution 201   Table 11 14   RTD Range and Resolution 201   Table 11 15   Input Resistance for Voltage Inputs 202   Table 11 16   Digital Inputs 202   Table 11 17   Digital Outputs Control   Alarm 203   Table 11 18   CPU Watchdog Output 203   Table 11 19   5V   dc  Output  Power to Operate Solid State Relays  204   Table 11 20   Reference Voltage Output  Power to Operate Bridge Circuit  Sensors  204   Table 11 21   Processor Serial Interface 204   Table 11 22   Processor Power Requirements 204   Table 11 23   Power Supply Environmental Specifications 205   Table 11 24   Power Supply Agency Approvals   Compliance 205   Table 11 25   Power Supply Physical Specifications 205   Table 11 26   Power Supply with Mounting Bracket 205   Table 11 27   Power Supply Inputs 
69. 1000 4 2  1995 Descarga electrost  tica   EN 61000 4 3  1997 Inmunidad radiada   EN 61000 4 4  1995 Perturbaciones transitorias el  ctricas r  pidas   EN 61000 4 5  1995 Sobretension   EN 61000 4 6  1994 Inmunidad conducida   EN 61000 4 11  1994 Ca  das de tensi  n  interrupciones breves y variaciones  de tensi  n   ENV 50204  1995 Tel  fono port  til    Watsonville  California  USA  Place of Issue    Sean Wilkinson  Name of Authorized Representative       Feb 28  2003  Date of Issue    Manager  Title of Authorized Representative          Signature of Authorized Representative E    
70. 1326  1997 Elektroger  te zur Messung  Regelung und zum  Laboreinsatz EMC   Richtlinien  Klasse A    EN 61000 3 2  1995 Grenzen der Oberwellenstromemissionen   EN 61000 3 3  1995 Grenzen der Spannungsschwankungen   EN 61000 4 2  1995 Elektrostatische Entladung   EN 61000 4 3  1997     Strahlungsimmunitat   EN 61000 4 4  1995 Elektrische schnelle St    e   EN 61000 4 5  1995  SpannungsstoRimmunit  t   EN 61000 4 6  1994  St  rimmunit  t   EN 61000 4 11  1994 Immunit  t gegen Spannungsgef  lle  kurze  Unterbrechungen und Spannungsabweichungen   ENV 50204  1995 Mobiltelefon    Declara que el producto siguiente    Designaci  n  Serie CLS200   N  meros de modelo  2    04  08    16     1  2  3    4   0 1    2    0 1    2   0 1 2    3   0 1 2    3   0 1    2    1    2 letras    numeros     Espa  ol    Clasificaci  n  Categor  a de instalaci  n II  grado de contaminaci  n  ambiental II  Tension nominal  15 a 24Vcc    Consumo nominal   de energia  610 mA maximo   Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de las siguientes Directivas de la Union  Europea  usando las secciones pertinentes de las reglas normalizadas y los  documentos relacionados que se muestran     89 336 EEC   Directiva de Compatibilidad Electromagn       EN 61326  1997 Equipo el  trico para medici  n control y uso en  laboratorios   Requisitos de compatibilidad  electromagn  tica  Clase A    EN 61000 3 2 1995 L  mites para emisiones de corriente arm  nica   EN 61000 3 3 1995 Limitaciones de fluctuaciones del voltaje   EN 6
71. 15    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        From the single loop display  press the RAMP SOAK key  three times  The SET MODE parameter allows you to  change the ramp soak mode        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  01 A SEGO1 05 R  SET MODE  START    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Watlow Anafaze 147    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak CLS200 Series User s Guide    See Running a Profile on page 148 and Holding a Profile or  Continuing from Hold on page 150 for instructions on  changing the ramp soak mode     Assigning a Profile to a Loop    Use this parameter to assign a profile to a loop     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 ASSIGN R S    PROFILE  A    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable Values  A to Q or NONE       Assigning a Profile the First Time  To assign a profile to a loop that does not have a profile cur   rently assigned     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop you want  to assign a profile to     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key  The ASSIGN R S PRO   FILE parameter appears     3  Choose one of the available profiles and press ENTER    or    press BACK to return to single loop display without  sending profile data to the controller     Assigning  Changing and Unassigning a Profile  To assign a new profile to a loop that already has one assigned     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop in which  you want to change or unassign the profile     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key three times     3  Press the NO key  You will see the RESET PROFILE  parameter  See Resetting a Pro
72. 200 66 to 1 760  7 2  4 0  22 1  12 3  E  328 to 1 448  200 to 787  1 8  1 0  2 9  1 6    True for 10  to 100  of span except type B  which is specified for 800   F to 3200   F   Table 11 14 RTD Range and Resolution  Accuracy Accuracy at    M at 25  C 0 to 50  C  Name   Range   Range   Resolution ikain pal Ambient Ambient  in   F in   C in   C in   C    F   C oF   C  148 0 to    100 0 to 25 40 7   404    1 0   40 6  RTD1 0 023  527 0 275 0 275  1 9    1 14   42 8    1 6  k 25  2 5  1 4  5 9  3 3  RTD2    180   120to840  0 023  840  2 9  1 6  8 6  4 8  Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 201             Chapter 11  Specifications    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 11 15 Input Resistance for Voltage Inputs                   Range Input Resistance  0 to 12V 85 kQ  0 to 10V 50 kQ  0 to 5V 40 kQ  0to1V 7 4 KQ  0 to 500mV 6 2 kQ  0 to 100mV 1 2 KQ                Table 11 16 Digital Inputs       Parameter    Description       Number    8       Configu ation    8 selectable for output override  remote job  selection       Input Voltage Protection    Diodes to supply and common  Source must  limit current to 10 mA for override conditions       Voltage Levels     lt 1 3V  Low   gt 3 7V  High  TTL   5V maximum  OV minimum                Maximum Switch Resistance to Pull Input Low 1kQ  Minimum Switch Off Resistance 11 KQ  Update Rate 6 Hz             Outputs    202    The controller directly accommodates switched de and  open collector outputs only  These outputs can be used to  co
73. 206   Table 11 28   Power Supply Outputs 206   Table 11 29   Dual DAC Environmental Specifications 207   Table 11 30   Dual DAC Physical Specifications 207   Table 11 31   Dual DAC Power Requirements 208   Table 11 32   Dual DAC Specifications by Output Range 208   Table 11 33   Serial DAC Environmental Specifications 209   Table 11 34   Serial DAC Physical Specifications 209   Table 11 35   Serial DAC Agency Approvals  Compliance 210   Table 11 36   Serial DAC Inputs 210   Table 11 37   Serial DAC Power Requirements 210   Table 11 38   Serial DAC Analog Output Specifications 211    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze XV    List of Tables CLS200 Series User s Guide    xvi Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       System Overview       Manual Contents    Doc   0600 3050 2000    This manual describes how to install  set up  and operate a  CLS204  CLS208 or CLS216 controller  Each chapter cov   ers a different aspect of your control system and may apply  to different users     Chapter 1  System Overview provides a component  list and summary of features for the CLS200 series  controllers     Chapter 2  Installation provides detailed instruc   tions on installing the CLS200 series controller and its  peripherals     Chapter 3  Using the CLS200 provides an overview  of operator displays used for system monitoring and  job selection     Chapter 4  Setup provides detailed descriptions of  all menus and parameters for controller setup     Chapter 5  Extruder Control explains the addi
74. 20V       Thermocouple Break Detection    Pulse type for upscale break detection       Milliampere Inputs    0 to 20 mA  3    resistance  or 0 to 10 mA  6 Q resistance    with scaling resistors       Linear Voltage Input Ranges Avail   able    0 to12V  0 to 10V  0 to 5V  0 to 1V  0 to 500 mV  0 to 100 mV  with scaling resistors        Source Impedance       For 60mV thermocouple  measurements are within specifica  tion with up to 500 Q source resistance    For other types of analog signals  the maximum source imped   ance is 5 000 Q          200    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chap    Table 11 12 Pulse Inputs    ter 11  Specifications       Parameter    Description       Number    Frequency Range    1  0 to 2 000 Hz       Input Voltage Protection    Diodes to supply and common       Voltage Levels    Pull Input Low    Maximum Switch Resistance to     lt 1 3V  Low     gt 3 7V  High  TTL     2 kQ          Minimum Switch Off Resistance       30 kQ       Table 11 13 Thermocouple Range and                                                                                           Resolution  Accuracy  at aaa as  Thermocouple Range Range 25  C Ambient Ambient  Type in   F in   C  oF   C   F   C  J  350 to 1 400  212 to 760  2 2  1 2  3 3  1 8  K  450 to 2 500  268 to 1371  2 4  1 3  3 8  2 1  T  450 to 750  268 to 399 42 9  1 6 45 8 43 2  S 0 to 3 200  18 to 1 760  5 0 42 8  8 8 44 9  R 0 to 3 210  18 to 1 766  5 0  2 8  8 8  4 9  B 150 to 3 
75. 3 Bar Graph Display    Table 3 1 explains the symbols you see on the top line of  the bar graph display  These symbols appear when the con   troller is in dual output mode  heat and cool outputs en   abled  and single output mode  heat or cool outputs  enabled  but not both      Table 3 1 Bar Graph Display Symbols             Symbol Description   lt  Loop is in low process or low deviation alarm    gt  Loop is in high process or high deviation alarm        Loop is above setpoint  If you enable the high  L or low deviation alarm  this symbol is scaled to  il     it  If you do not enable these alarms  these  symbols are scaled to the setpoint  5  of the  sensor s range        Loop is at setpoint  If you enable the high or   y low deviation alarm  this symbol is scaled to it   If you do not enable these alarms  these sym   bols are scaled to the setpoint  5  of the sen   sor   s range        Loop is below setpoint  If you enable the high       T T or low deviation alarm  this symbol is scaled to  it  If you do not enable these alarms  these  symbols are scaled to the setpoint  5  of the  sensor   s range         blank    LOOp   s input type is set to SKIP           Open thermocouple  T C   shorted T C   F reversed T C  open RTD or shorted RTD           Watlow Anafaze 55    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 3 2 explains the control status symbols on the bot   tom line of bar graph display  Additional symbols may ap   pear with the ramp soak opti
76. 42 9 R41  2 R40 10 R39  3 R38 11 R37  4 R36 12 R35  5 R34 13 R33  6 R32 14 R31  7 R30 15 R29  8 R28 16 R27          CLS216 Voltage Inputs                For each voltage input on a CLS216 controller  you must in   stall two resistors  The resistance must be correct for the  expected input range  Install the resistors in the listed lo     cations     Table 9 14 Resistor Values for CLS216          Doc   0600 3050 2000                Voltage Inputs  Resistor Values  Input Range RC RD  0 to 100mV   dc  499 Q 750 Q  0 to 500mV   dc  5 49 kQ 750 Q  0 to 1V   dc  6 91 kQ 442 02  0 to 5V   dc  39 2 kQ 475 0 Q  0 to 10V   dc  49 9 kQ 301 0 Q  0 to 12V   dc  84 5 KQ 422 0 Q       Watlow Anafaze    Resistor tolerance   0 1           185    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    Table 9 15 Resistor Locations for CLS216                         Voltage Inputs  Resistor Locations Resistor Locations  Loop RC RD Loop RC RD  1 R58 R42 9 R57 R41  2 R56 R40 10 R55 R39  3 R54 R38 11 R53 R37  4 R52 R36 12 R51 R35  5 R50 R34 13 R49 R33  6 R48 R32 14 R47 R31  7 R46 R30 15 R45 R29  8 R44 R28 16 R43 R27                            Scaling and Calibration    The controller provides offset calibration for thermocouple   RTD  and other fixed ranges  and offset and span  gain  cal   ibration for linear and pulse inputs  In order to scale linear  input signals  you must     1  Install appropriate scaling resistors   Contact Watlow  Anafaze   s Customer Service Department 
77. 600 3050 2000    Doc   0600 3050 2000    A    WARNING     A    WARNING        Installation    This chapter describes how to install the CLS200 series   controller and its peripherals  Installation of the controller   involves the following procedures    e Determining the best location for the controller   e Mounting the controller and TB50   e Power connection   e   nput wiring   e Communications wiring  EIA TIA 232 or EIA TIA   485     e Output wiring    Risk of electric shock  Shut off power to your    entire process before you begin installation  of the controller     The controller may fail in a 0  or 100  power    output state  To prevent death  personal inju   ry  equipment damage or property damage   install external safety shutdown devices  If  failure may cause death or injury  you must  install FM approved safety shutdown devic   es that operate independently from the pro   cess control equipment     Watlow Anafaze 11    Chapter 2  Installation    Typical Installation    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Figure 2 1 shows typical installations of the controller with  the TB50 and the TB18 terminal blocks  The type of termi   nal block you use greatly impacts the layout and wiring of  your installation site   See Figures 2 2 to 2 11      We recommend that you read this entire chapter first be   fore beginning the installation procedure  This will help  you to carefully plan and assess the installation     CLS200 with TB50 CSI Cable    8 Digital Inputs    35 Digital Outp
78. 73  233  location of 64  Alarm High SP parameter 67  Alarm Low SP parameter 67  alarms  acknowledging 59 60  alarm high  see process alarms  alarm low  see process alarms  codes 164  166  deadband 102  delaying 64  100  103  deviation 164  deviation  see process alarms  digital output polarity 81  disabling control on alarm outputs 94  displays 58  failed sensor 65  166  global 99  global alarm output 68  high deviation alarm settings 100 101  high process alarm settings 100  hysteresis 68  loop delay 64  low deviation alarm settings 100 101  low process alarm settings 102  messages 166  process 164  resetting 165  restoring control after sensor failure 92  reversed thermocouple 85  RTD  see failed sensor alarms  SCRs 37  sensor fail percent output power 97  setting up 66 69  setup parameters 99 103  solid state relays 37  startup delay 64  78  system 60  166  T C BREAK  switching to manual mode 97    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Index    thermocouple  see failed sensor alarms  tolerance 138  151  troubleshooting 164  166  wiring 37  ambient temperature  H W AMBIENT FAILURE message 169  operating range 12  AMBIENT WARNING 168  ANAINSTL 80  analog inputs  see sensor inputs  analog output 158  see also Dual DAC or Serial DAC  ASSIGN R S PROFILE 148  AUTO 56  61  automatic control  selecting 61  automatic mode  restoring after failed sensor repair 66  autotuning 62 64    B    BACK key 53   bar graph display 55 56  control status symbols 56  navigating in 56  ramp soak symbols 147  sy
79. 73  233  parameters in menu 93  SETUP LOOP PV RETRANSMIT  description 113  location 112  233       230    Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    SETUP LOOP RATIO CONTROL  description 125  location 112  233  SETUP RAMP SOAK PROFILE 137  location 136  233  shutdown devices 9  single loop display 56  control status symbols 56  navigating 57  ramp soak symbols 146  when running ramp soak profile 146  solid state relays  5 Vdc power from controller 204  distributed zero crossing 158  troubleshooting controller connections 173  specifications 193 211  communications 204  controller 204  controller inputs 200 202  controller outputs 202 204  CPU watchdog timer 203  Dual DAC 207 208  power supply 205 206  Serial DAC 209 211  TB50 196  SPREAD  default value 90  description 92  156  location 73  spread 92  ST alarm code 166  STARTUP ALARM DELAY  default value 74  description 78  location 73  233    T    T control status symbol 56   TB18  alarm outputs 37 38  connections 40  CPU watchdog timer output 38  digital output wiring 36  testing after installation 28  to power encoders 34  troubleshooting 173   TB50  alarm outputs 37 38  connecting to controller 27  connections for CLS204 41  connections for CLS208 41  connections for CLS216 42  CPU watchdog timer output 38  digital output wiring 36  dimensions 196 199  for powering Serial DAC 44  mounting on DIN rail 17  mounting with standoffs 18  specifications 196  technical description 8  terminal specifications 197  testing after
80. 9  description 101  location 73  233   LO DEV ALARM TYPE  default value 99  description 101  location 73  233   LO PROC ALARM OUTPUT  default value 99  description 102  location 73  233   LO PROC ALARM SETPT  default value 99  description 102  location 73  233   LO PROC ALARM TYPE  default value 99  description 102  location 73  233   LOAD SETUP FROM JOB  CANNOT LOAD JOB 75  default value 74  description 75  job display 60  location 73  233   locking the keypad 78   LOOP NAME  default value 82  description 84  location 73  233   loops  autotuning  see autotuning  naming 84    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    number available 200  ramp soak profiles  see ramp soak 148  single loop display  see single loop display  tuning 159 161  low deviation alarm  see process alarms  LOW POWER 166  168  LP alarm code 164    M control status symbol 56  MAN 56  61  MAN AUTO CONTROL OUTPUTS DISABLED 61  MAN AUTO key 54   does not work 170   locking and unlocking 78   switching control statuses 61  manual control   selecting 61   setting the output level 62  MANUAL I O TEST 103   location 73  233   parameters in menu 103  menu tree   all setup menus 233   enhanced features 112   ramp soak profiles 136   standard setup menus 73  menus   accessing 71   global parameters 74   loop alarms 99   loop control 90   loop input 82   loop outputs 93   manual I O test 103   menu tree  see menu tree   process variable retransmit 113   ramp soak profile 137  model information   accessi
81. A 232    46 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    EIA TIA 485 Interface    Personal Computer       Chapter 2  Installation    To communicate with more than one CLS200 series con   troller on a controller network  or to use communication ca   ble lengths greater than 50 feet  15 2 m  from PC to  controller  you must use EIA TIA 485 communications     When using EIA TIA 485 communications  you must at   tach an optically isolated EIA TIA 232 to EIA TIA 485 con   verter to the computer     Figure 2 32 and Figure 2 33 show the recommended system  wiring  To avoid ground loops  use an optically isolated  EIA TIA 232 to EIA TIA 485 converter between the com   puter and the EIA TIA 485 network                                                           EIA TIA 485 Converter First CLS200 Last CLS200  JU1 JUT  eA eA  TXA TDA TX  RXA 25  e B RXA 25 B  TXB TDB TX  RXB 23 i RXB 23  RXA RDA RX  TXA 26 TXA 26  RXB RDB RX  TXB 24 TXB 24  Do not  connect  shield to  CLS200    Cable Recommendations    Figure 2 32 EIA TIA 485 Wiring    Watlow Anafaze recommends Belden 9843 cable or its    equivalent  This cable includes three 24 AWG  0 2 mm    shielded  twisted pairs  It should carry signals of up to  19 2k baud with no more than acceptable losses for up to  4 000 feet  1 220 m      EIA TIA 485 Network Connections    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Walow Anafaze recommends that you use a single daisy  chain configuration rather than spurs  Run a twisted pair  cable from 
82. ALING FILTER  HT OUTPUT  OUTPUT    Ramp soak  HI PV     Linear and pulse      SPREAD  HEAT T C BRK LO PROC ALARM  KEYBOARD LOCK TET OUT AVG  SETPT   STATUS  RDG    f RESTORE PID HEAT OUTPUT  LO PROC ALARM   aNERAUE ear and pulse    inteiny   TYPE       PROCESS POWER  DIGIN           inear and pulse                                         UT SCALING  CONTROLLER RDG   ADDRESS  ear and pulse   P TER   COMMUNICATIONS     INPUT FILTER   BAUD RATE   COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL   COMMUNICATIONS  ERR CHECK           AC LINE FREQ           DIG OUT POLARITY  ON ALARM              CLS 200     FIRMWARE INFO           Ifthe enhanced features option or ramp soak  feature is installed  refer to Chapter 6  En    hanced Features  or Chapter 7  Ramp   Soak  for additional menus     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Figure 4 1                      COOL OUTPUT TYPE        ALARM DEADBAND                    COOL OUTPUT  CYCLE TIME    TP     ALARM DELAY           SDAC PARAMETERS   SDAC              COOL OUTPUT  ACTION                                   FAIL  CL OUTPUT                 COOL T C BRK  OUT AVG              COOL OUTPUT           Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Menu Tree    73    Chapter 4  Setup    Setup Global Parameters Menu       LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP GLOBAL       PARAMETERS    ALARM __ SETPOINT       STATUS OUT     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 4 1 shows the parameters available in this menu                                         Table 4 1 Global Parameters   Parameter Default Value  LOAD 
83. ARD    COMPONENT SIDE J       Figure 2 13 CLS200 Series Controller with  TB50    Wiring the Power Supply    A    WARNING  Use a power supply with a Class 2 rating  only  UL approval requires a Class 2 power    supply     Connect power to the controller before any other connec   tions  This allows you to ensure that the controller is work   ing before any time is taken installing inputs and outputs     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 25    Chapter 2  Installation    NOTE     NOTE     A    CAUTION     26    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 2 2 Power Connections       Function Power Supply CLS200 TB2       DC Power     Controller   12 to 24V   dc  i    DC Common 12 to 24V   dc  l  Common       Earth Ground Ground b                   1  Connect the dc common terminal on the power supply  to the dc common     terminal on CLS200 TB2     2  Connect the positive terminal on the power supply to  the dc positive     terminal on CLS200 TB2     3   Ifusing an isolated dc output or another power supply  to power the loads  connect the dc common of the sup   ply powering the loads to the dc common of the supply  powering the controller     4  Use the ground connector on TB2 for chassis ground   This terminal is connected to the CLS200 chassis and  must be connected to earth ground     5  Connect 120 240V   ac  power to the power supply     Connect the dc common of the power supply    used for loads to the dc common of the sup   ply powering the controller  If the supplies  are not
84. ARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  NONE or input number 1 to 8     Use the next parameter  OVERRIDE DIG IN ACTIVE  toset  the signal state that activates the output override feature     Do not rely solely on the output override fea     ture to shut down your process  Install exter   nal safety devices or over temperature  devices for emergency shutdowns     Override Digital Input Active    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Specify whether a low or high signal activates the output  override feature  see OUTPUT OVERRIDE DIG INPUT  above         LOOP PROCESS UNITS    OVERRIDE DIG IN  ACTIVE   LOW    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  HIGH or LOW     Watlow Anafaze 77    Chapter 4  Setup    Startup Alarm Delay    Keyboard Lock Status    Power Up Output Status    78    A    WARNING     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    You can set the input to be active when low or active when  high  When the input selected for OUTPUT OVERRIDE DIG  INPUT changes to the specified state  all the loop   s outputs  are set to their sensor fail levels     Set a startup delay for process and deviation alarms for all  loops  The controller does not report these alarm conditions  for the specified number of minutes after the controller  powers up  This feature does not delay failed sensor  alarms        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    STARTUP ALARM       DELAY   0 MINS    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 60 minutes     Set this parameter to ON to disable the CHN
85. ATUS OUT        Enter the minimum output percentage  from 0 to 100   For this  example we will assume a full span with a minimum of 0   Press  ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS  MAX INP  1000    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Enter the maximum input value  which corresponds to the maxi   mum output percentage  For a range of 0 to 1000   F  set the maxi   mum input value to 1000   F  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS  MAX OUT   100    STATUS OUT     ALARM SETPOINT    Enter the maximum output percentage  from 0 to 100   For this  example we will assume a full span with a maximum of 100    Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 COOL OUTPUT  RETRANS PV  NONE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              The process variable retransmit section of the controller program   ming is now completed  We are not using the cool output of loop 2  to retransmit a process variable  so choose NONE  Press ENTER           Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze 117    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Cascade Control    118    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Notes about this application     e This is not a thermocouple curve type of signal and re   quires a linear input range in the recorder     e To complete this configuration  the loop 2 output must  be enabled and tailored to meet the requirements of  the data application  In this example  the data logger  requires an analog input of 4 to 20 mA     e The CLS200 Series controllers must be used with a  Wat
86. CLS200 Parts List    You may have received one or more of the following compo   nents  See Figure 2 1 on page 12 for CLS200 configuration  information     e CLS200 series controller   e Controller mounting kit   e  TB50 with 50 pin SCSI cable   e   EJA TIA 232 or EJA TIA 485 communications cable  e Power supply with mounting bracket and screws   e Serial DAC  digital to analog converter    e Special input resistors  installed in CLS200    e Users guide    Number of Loops       04   4 loops  08   8 loops  16   16 loops    Controller Type  1   Standard EPROM   2   Extruder applications   3   Ramp soak option   4   Enhanced features option  includes cascade  PV retransmit  ratio  remote setpoint     Terminal Board   0   No terminal board accessory   1   18 terminal block mounted on unit  no SCSI cable required  2   50 pin terminal board  includes 3 ft  SCSI cable    Power Supply   0   No power supply   2   120 240V    ac   50 60Hz panel mount power supply adapter   5V   dc    4A  15V   dc    1 2A  CE approved    SCSI Cables  for use with 50 pin terminal board   0   No special SCSI cable  3 ft  cable is included with 50 pin terminal board   1  6 ft  SCSI cable   2   3 ft  right angle SCSI cable   3   6 ft  right angle SCSI cable      Communications Cables  For ElIA TIA 232 communications with computer   0   No communications cable   1   10 ft   3 0 m  communications cable  DB 9 female bare wire   2   25 ft   7 6 m  communications cable  DB 9 female bare wire   3   50 ft   15 2 m 
87. CLS200 Series  User   s Guide    Watlow  1241 Bundy Boulevard  Winona  MN 55987    Customer Service   Phone         1 800 414 4299  Faxes ace 1 800 445 8992    Technical Support    Phone          1  507  494 5656   FaX noana   1  507  452 4507   Email           wintechsupport watlow com    Part No  0600 3050 2000 Rev  A  November 2008    Copyright    1998 2003  Watlow Anafaze    Information in this manual is subject to change without notice  No part of this publi   cation may be reproduced  stored in a retrieval system  or transmitted in any form  without written permission from Watlow Anafaze     Warranty    Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated warrants that the products furnished under this Agree   ment will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years  from the date of shipment  The Customer shall provide notice of any defect to Watlow  Anafaze  Incorporated within one week after the Customer s discovery of such defect   The sole obligation and liability of Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated under this warranty  shall be to repair or replace  at its option and without cost to the Customer  the defec   tive product or part     Upon request by Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated  the product or part claimed to be  defective shall immediately be returned at the Customer s expense to Watlow Anafaze   Incorporated  Replaced or repaired products or parts will be shipped to the Customer  at the expense of Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated     There shall be no warranty or l
88. G SP  MAN AUTO   and RAMP SOAK keys on the keypad  If the keys are dis   abled  pressing them has no effect  If you want to use these  functions  turn off the keyboard lock     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    KEYBOARD LOCK       STATUS   OFF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  ON or OFF     Do not set the controller to start from memo     ry if it may be unsafe for your process to have  outputs on upon power up     Set the initial power up state of the control outputs  If you  choose OFF  all loops are initially set to manual mode at 0   output  If you choose MEMORY  the loops are restored to the  control status and output value prior to powering down     See In Case of a Power Failure on page 152 for information  about how this feature affects ramp soak profiles     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 4  Setup    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    POWER UP OUTPUT    STATUS   OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  OFF or MEMORY        Process Power Digital Input    Controller Address    Doc   0600 3050 2000    To enable the thermocouple short detection feature  select  a digital input  1 to 8   Connect the specified input to a de   vice that pulls the input low when the process power is on   A short is indicated when the process power is on and the  temperature does not rise as expected    If the controller determines that there is a thermocouple  short  it sets the loop to manual mode at the power level set  for
89. INT        READY SEGMENT  EDIT EVENTS              EXTERNAL RESET  INPUT NUMBER           EDIT SEGMENT  NUMBER        SEGMENT JHF  SEG TIME           SEGMENT  4  SEG SETPT           SEGMENT JHF  EDIT SEG EVENTS     READY EVENT  YES OUTPUT   lt     BACK          See Process Variable Retransmit on page 113              ENTER       Y           __YES         lt      BACK           SEG JHF EVENT    OUTPUT     SEG dH EV  DOdH   ACTIVE STATE                    SEGMENT JHF  EDIT SEG TRGGRS     YES     gt   a   BACK               SEG  H TRIG        INPUT NR     SEG JHF TRI DIdHE   fy ACTIVE STATE                          SEGMENT JHF  SEG TOLERANCE              SEGMENT  4  LAST SEGMENT           REPEAT CYCLES                 ENEA  TR       SEG JHF TR DIdHE  1G         lt q           Figure 7 2 Setup Ramp Soak Profiles Menu    Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Setup Global Parameters Menu    With the Ramp and Soak option an additional menu ap   pears on the Setup Global Parameters Menu    Ramp Soak Time Base    The RAMP SOAK TIME BASE parameter is in the SETUP  GLOBAL PARAMETERS menu     Use this parameter to set the time base in all your ramp   soak profiles  When set to HOURS MINS  the setpoint is up   dated once every minute  When set to MINS SECS  the set   point is updated once every second     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    RAMP SOAK TIME    BASE  HOURS MINS    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  HOURS MINS  hours
90. L FILTER  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  COOL CONTROL OUTPUT  default value 93  description 94  location 73  233  COOL CONTROL PB  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  COOL CONTROL TD  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  COOL CONTROL TI  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  COOL OUTPUT  curves 98  description 98  location 73  233  COOL OUTPUT ACTION  description 96  location 73  233  COOL OUTPUT CYCLE TIME  description 95  location 73  233    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    COOL OUTPUT LIMIT  description 96  location 73  233   COOL OUTPUT LIMIT TIME  description 96  location 73  233   COOL OUTPUT RETRANS PV  description 114  location 112  233   COOL OUTPUT TYPE  description 94  location 73  233   cool output  see control outputs   COOL RETRANS MAX INP  description 114  location 112  233   COOL RETRANS MAX OUT   description 115  location 112  233   COOL RETRANS MIN INP  description 114  location 112  233   COOL RETRANS MIN OUT   description 114  location 112  233   COOL T C BRK OUT AVG  description 97  location 73  233   COPY SETUP FROM PROFILE  description 138  location 136  233   CPU watchdog timer 38  203   CRC  see cyclic redundancy check   C UL  see agency compliance   current inputs  scaling resistors 33  181  184  wiring 33   CYCLE NR  147   cycle time 95   cyclic redundancy check 80             D  D O alarm polarity parameter 68  DAC  see Dual DAC or Serial DAC  data logging 113 
91. LE TIME   COOL CONTROL TI SDAC HI VALUE HI DEV ALARM OUTPUT  STARTUP ALARM DELAY DISP FORMAT COOL CONTROL TD HEAT OUTPUT ACTION LO DEV ALARM TYPE   RAMP SOAK TIME BASE INPUT SCALING HI PV COOL CONTROL FILTER HEAT OUTPUT LIMIT LO DEV ALARM OUTPUT  KEYBOARD LOCK STATUS INPUT SCALING HI RDG SPREAD HEAT OUTPUT LIMIT TIME LO PROC ALARM SETPT       POWER UP OUTPUT STATUS    INPUT SCALING LO PV    RESTORE PID DIGIN    SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT    LO PROC ALARM TYPE       PROCESS POWER DIGIN    CONTROLLER ADDRESS    INPUT SCALING LO RDG  INPUT FILTER          COMMUNICATIONS BAUD RATE       COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL  COMMUNICATIONS ERR CHECK       AC LINE FREQ          DIG OUT POLARITY ON ALARM  CLS200  FIRMWARE INFO            Additional Enhanced Features Option Menus    HEAT T C BRK OUT AVG       LO PROC ALARM OUTPUT          HEAT OUTPUT ALARM DEADBAND  COOL CONTROL OUTPUT ALARM DELAY  COOL OUTPUT TYPE    COOL OUTPUT CYCLE TIME       SDAC PARAMETERS       COOL OUTPUT ACTION  COOL OUTPUT LIMIT       COOL OUTPUT LIMIT TIME       SENSOR FAIL CL OUTPUT  COOL T C BRK OUT AVG          COOL OUTPUT       Additional Ramp Soak Option Menus       SETUP LOOP PV RETRANSMIT  HEAT OUTPUT RETRANS PV    SETUP LOOP CASCADE  p  119     CASCADE PRIM  LOOP    SETUP LOOP RATIO CONTROL  p  125   RATIO CONTROL MSTR LOOP       SETUP LOOP PV RETRANSMIT  HEAT OUTPUT RETRANS PV       HEAT RETRANS MIN INP    CASCADE BASE SP    RATIO CONTROL MIN SP    SETUP RAMP SOAK PROFILE  p  137     EDIT RAMP  amp  SOAK PROFILE   
92. LOOP PV LOOP LOOP RATIO    LooP 1 0  PARAMETERS    INPUTS    PARAMETERS OUTPUTS    RETRANSMIT CASCADE CONTROL ALARMS TEST  ll YES YES     YES l  y  HEAT OUTPUT CASCADE RATIO CONTROL  RETRANS PV  PRIM  LOOP  MSTR LOOP   eee  Enter 1 9    v  HEAT RETRANS CASCADE RATIO CONTROL  MIN INP  BASE SP  MIN SP   Enter  NONE        or NO HEAT RETRANS CASCADE RATIO CONTROL  MIN OUT   MIN SP  MAX SP   Enter  NONE  or NO  HEAT RETRANS CASCADE RATIO CONTROL  MAX INP  MAX SP  CTRL RATIO   l i    HEAT RETRANS CASCADE RATIO CONTROL  MAX OUT   UT SPAN  SP DIFF        112        _  Enter 1 9                               COOL OUTPUT  RETRANS PV              COOL RETRANS  MIN INP     COOL RETRANS  MIN OUT           COOL RETRANS  MAX INP                            COOL RETRANS  MAX OUT                  Figure 6 1                                                         Enhanced Features Option Menus    Watlow Anafaze                                                       CASCADE  CL SPAN            Doc   0600 3050 2000       CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Process Variable Retransmit    The process variable retransmit feature retransmits the  process signal of one loop  primary  via the control output  of another loop  secondary   This signal is linear and pro   portional to the engineering units of the primary loop in   put     Typical uses include data logging to analog recording sys   tems and long distance transmission of the primary signal  to avoid degradation of the 
93. Latched  e The unlatched trigger starts continues a segment   One Trigger Unlatched e The latched trigger has no effect                 This parameter appears only if you answered YES to EDIT  SEG TRGGRS        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEGO1 TR1 DI08  TRIG  UNLATCHED    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  LATCHED or UNLATCHED     Segment Tolerance    Set a positive or negative tolerance value for each segment   Tolerance works as shown in Figure 7 3     Positive Tolerance Value Negative Tolerance Value    eee of Tolerance Within Tolerance  Tolerance    Setpoint  gt      Setting Setpoint 4 w an                Setting       Within Tolerance                Out of Tolerance          Figure 7 3 Positive and Negative Tolerances    If you enter a positive tolerance  the process is out of toler   ance when the process variable goes above the setpoint  plus the tolerance     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 143    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak CLS200 Series User s Guide    If you enter a negative tolerance  the process goes out of tol   erance when the process variable goes below the setpoint  minus the tolerance        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEGMENT 01    SEG TOLERNCE  OFF    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values    99 to 99  or OFF  no tolerance limit    See Setpoints and Tolerances for Various Input Types on  page 144     Last Segment    Specify whether the current segment is the last one in the  profile        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  A SEGMENT 01  LAST 
94. Many PC communications ports connect the communica   tions common to chassis ground  When such a PC is con   nected to the controller  this can provide a path to ground  for current from the process that can enter the controller  through a sensor  such as a thermocouple   This creates a  ground loop that can affect communications and other con   troller functions  To eliminate a ground loop  either use an  optically isolated communications adapter or take mea   sures to ensure that sensors and all other connections to  the controller are isolated and not conducting current into  the unit     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    Power Connections    This section covers making the power connections to the  CLS200 and connecting the TB50        AAAA AAAA AAAA     TB1   to signal    2000 0e 0 000002                                    TB2 20O DoOod0000000000000 inputs    to power oo0000000000000000 COMPONENT SIDE   supply   eeooegeoejeogooeooq B18  o0000000000000000000000000  to digital       e0070D0000000D2000020000000000    outputs     XN S    Figure 2 12 CLS200 Series Controller with  TB18                  TB1   to signal  inputs        O WN D  2 2  D BO    o  OO000000000000000 o Do                222eegeoog2oo g    oooo90o0o0900000000009       supply      su p p   y  O oogoo0p000000000000000000 O Ba e    ood          world ARARE    BERS SRE ESETES   O  SCSI 2  TB BO S N b c  to TB50                                      BO
95. Menus 136    Setup Global Parameters Menu 137  Ramp Soak Time Base 137   Setup Ramp Soak Profile Menu 137  Edit Ramp Soak Profile 137  Copy Setup From Profile 138  Tolerance Alarm Time 138  Ready Segment Setpoint 138  Ready Segment Edit Events 139  External Reset Input Number 139  Edit Segment Number 140  Segment Time 140  Segment Setpoint 140  Edit Segment Events 141  Edit Segment Triggers 142  Segment Tolerance 143    vi Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Table of Contents    Last Segment 144   Repeat Cycles 144   Setpoints and Tolerances for Various Input Types 144  Using Ramp Soak 145   Ramp Soak Displays 146   Assigning a Profile to a Loop 148   Running a Profile 148   Holding a Profile or Continuing from Hold 150   Responding to a Tolerance Alarm 151   Resetting a Profile 151   In Case of a Power Failure 152    8 Tuning and Control 153    Control Algorithms 153  On Off Control 154  Proportional Control 154  Proportional and Integral Control 155  Proportional  Integral and Derivative Control 155  Heat and Cool Outputs 156  Control Outputs 157  Output Control Signals 157  Output Filter 158  Reverse and Direct Action 159  Setting Up and Tuning PID Loops 159  Proportional Band  PB  Settings 159  Integral Settings 160  Derivative Settings 160  General PID Constants by Application 161  Proportional Band Only  P  161  Proportional with Integral  Pl  161  PI with Derivative  PID  161    9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring 163    When There is a Pr
96. OINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  For linear inputs  any value between   99 9  and 999  9  of full scale  where 100  corresponds  to 60mV and 0  corresponds to OmV  For pulse inputs  any  value between 0 and 2000 HZ  The high reading must be   greater than the low reading  LO RDG      Set a low process variable for input scaling purposes  The  low process variable and the low reading  LO RDG  together  define one of the points on the linear scaling function   s con   version line  Set LO PV to the value you want displayed  when the signal is at the level set for the low reading  LO  RDG      LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT SCALING    LO PV   0    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value between the minimum pro   cess variable and the high process variable for the selected  display format  See Table 4 9 on page 87     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Low Reading    Input Filter    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Enter the input signal level that corresponds to the low  process variable  LO PV  you entered in the previous pa   rameter        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT SCALING  LO RDG  0 0 FS    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  For linear inputs  any value between    99 9  and 999 9  percent of full scale  where 100  cor   responds to 60mV and 0  corresponds to OmV  For pulse   inputs  any value between 0 and 2000 HZ  The low reading  must be less than the high r
97. P PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL  MSTR LOOP  01       ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Assign loop 01 to be the master loop  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  02 RATIO CONTROL  MIN SP  0    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Enter the minimum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will  use 0   F  Press ENTER           LOOP PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL  MAX SP  300 0    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Enter the maximum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will  use 300 0   F as a maximum  Press ENTER           LOOP PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL  CTRL RATIO  1 0       ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Enter the control ratio  which is the multiple applied to the master  process variable  In this example the ratio is 1 0  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL    SP DIFF   0          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Enter the setpoint differential  or offset   For this example we have  no offset requirement and will use 0  Press ENTER           130    4  Press BACK several times until the normal loop display  appears  The setpoint of loop 2 will now be equal to the  process variable of loop 1     5  To complete the remote analog setpoint setup  loop 1  may be configured for outputs and alarms  Likewise   loop 2 must be configured for inputs  outputs  and  alarms  See Chapter 4  Setup for information on loop  setup     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Differential Control    Chap
98. Problems    WatView  AnaWin or Anasoft    User Written Software    NO Key Reset    If the controller and serial communications connections  seem to be working correctly  but you are still not getting  the result you expect  consult the resources you have avail   able for the software program you are using     Consult the AnaWin or Anasoft User   s Guide for help with  the user interface  WatView comes with a context sensitive  help explaining operation of the software  Context sensi   tive means that you can press the F1 key to get help related  to the part of the program you are using     You can request a communications specification from Wat   low Anafaze if you want to write your own software  Wat   low Anafaze will answer technical questions that arise  during your software development process  but does not  otherwise support user developed or third party software  in any way     Performing a NO key reset returns all controller settings to  their defaults  All recipes are also cleared     To perform a NO key reset    1  Make a record of the controller   s settings   2  Turn off power to the unit    3  Press and hold the NO key on the keypad   4    Turn on power to the controller still holding the NO  key     5  When prompted RESET WITH DEFAULTS   release the  NO key and press the YES key     6  Ifyou do not see the RESET WITH DEFAULTS  prompt  or do not get a chance to press YES  repeat the proce   dure     7  Restore the controller settings     If you have a stand alone
99. RP8                Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    CLS204 and CLS208 RTDs and Thermistors    For each RTD or thermistor input on a CLS204 or CLS208  controller  you must install three resistors  RA  RB  and  RC  The resistance must be correct for the expected input  range  RA and RB are a matched pair of resistors  Install  them in the resistor pack  RP  locations as shown in the il   lustration below     Table 9 10 Resistor Values for CLS204 208  RTD and Thermistor Inputs       Resistor Values                         Input RA RB RC  RTD1 10 0 kQ 80 Q  RTD2 25 0 kQ 100 Q       Resistor tolerances  RA RB matched to 0 02   2 ppm  C   and absolute tolerance is 0 1   10 ppm   C  RC accurate to  0 05      RP   fen    RA RB                Table 9 11 Resistor Locations for CLS204 208  RTD and Thermistor Inputs                                  Resistor Locations  Loop RA RB RC  1 RPI R57  2 RP2 R55  3 RP3 R53  4 RP4 R51  5 RP5 R49  6 RP6 R47  7 RP7 R45  8 RP8 R43                   Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 183    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    CLS216 Input Circuit    CLS216 Current Inputs    184    The CLS216 can accept single ended thermocouple  mV     dc   V   dc  and mA  dc  inputs  Unless ordered with  special inputs  the controller accepts only signals within  the standard range of  10 to 6 0mV   dc      To accommodate other signals  the input
100. S to change the mode  if the mode is MAN  press NO to set the output power     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 61    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Manual Output Levels    Autotuning a Loop    Prerequisites    62    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Go to the next subsection  Manual Output Levels   press NO if in AUTO to cancel and remain in AUTO mode     4  Select a mode by pressing the up or down key  YES or  NO  to scroll through the modes     5  Press ENTER to make the mode change  press BACK to return to the single loop display without  saving the new mode setting     6  Ifyou set the loop to manual  you are prompted for the  output power  Go to Manual Output Levels below     If the loop to is set to manual control  the controller  prompts for output levels for the enabled control outputs   Use this menu to set the manual heat and cool output lev   els  You should see a display like this     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SET HEAT    OUTPUT  90     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        1  Press YES to change the output power level   If the heat  outputs are enabled  you will be able to change the  heat output power level  If only the cool outputs are  enabled  you will be able to change only the cool output  power level     _or      Press NO to go to the cool output  if available  and then  press YES to change the cool output     2  Press up or down  YES or NO  to select a new output  power level     3  Press ENTER to store your changes  press BACK to discard your changes and ret
101. S200 Series User s Guide    Table 6 5 Application Example  Setting Up  Differential Control       Display User Input    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 02    Press YES to setup the ratio control parameters for loop 2   RATIO CONTROL     ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  MSTR LOOP  01    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Assign loop 01 to be the master loop  Press ENTER              LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  MIN SP  300 0    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Enter the minimum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will  use 300 0   F Press ENTER           02 RATIO CONTROL  MAX SP  400 0    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Enter the maximum ratio loop setpoint  For this example  we will  use 400 0   F Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  CTRL RATIO  1 0    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Enter the control ratio  which is the multiple applied to the master  process variable  In this example the ratio is 1 0  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  SP DIFF   50       Enter the setpoint differential  or offset   For this example  we have  an offset of  50  Press ENTER                    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        3  Press BACK several times until the normal loop display  appears  The setpoint of loop 2 will now be equal to  process variable of loop 1 plus 50   F     4  To complete the differential control setup  loop 1 and  loop 2 must be configured for inputs  outputs  an
102. SEGMENT  NO    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  NO or YES     Repeat Cycles  Set the number of times you want a profile to repeat or cycle     The profile returns to START mode after completing the  number of cycles specified here     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A REPEAT CYCLES         1    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  1 to 99  or C  continuous cycling      Setpoints and Tolerances for Various Input Types    Setpoints and tolerances are set in segments before the  profile is assigned to a particular loop  When the profile is  used with a loop  the INPUT TYPE and DISP FORMATS set   tings are applied to the following parameters     e Ready setpoint  e Segment setpoint  e Segment tolerance    Refer to Table 7 3 to determine how these parameters are  affected for the various INPUT TYPE and DISP FORMAT  settings     144 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 7 3    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Display Formats                Input Type Display Format Effect on Parameter  Thermocouples      and RTDs N A No decimal shift   999 to 3000 No decimal shift   9999 to 30000 Setting multiplied by 10   999 9 to 3000 0 No decimal shift  additional tenth in display  Linear     99 99 to 300 00    Settings divided by 10        9 999 to 30 000    Settings divided by 100              0 9999 to 3 0000    Using Ramp Soak          Settings divided by 1 000    This section explains how to assign a profile to a loop  how  t
103. SETUP FROM JOB  1  SAVE SETUP TO JOB  1  JOB SELECT DIG INPUTS  NONE  JOB SEL DIG INS ACTIVE  LOW  OUTPUT OVERRIDE DIG INPUT  NONE  OVERRIDE DIG IN ACTIVE  LOW  STARTUP ALARM DELAY  0 MINS  RAMP SOAK TIME BASE   HOURS MINS  KEYBOARD LOCK STATUS  OFF  POWER UP OUTPUT STATUS  OFF  PROCESS POWER DIGIN  NONE  CONTROLLER ADDRESS  1  COMMUNICATIONS BAUD RATE  9600  COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL  ANA  COMMUNICATIONS ERR CHECK  BCC  AC LINE FREQ  60 HERTZ  DIG OUT POLARITY ON ALARM  LOW       CLS200  model no   fi mware rev                 The RAMP SOAK TIME BASE parameter appears only if the ramp soak    feature is installed     74 Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Load Setup From Job    NOTE     Save Setup to Job    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Current settings are overwritten when you    select a job from memory  Save your current  settings to another job number if you want to  keep them     Load any one of eight jobs saved in battery backed RAM     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    LOAD SETUP          FROM JOB  1    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Selectable values  1 to 8    The following parameters are loaded for each loop as part  of a job     e PID constants  filter settings  setpoints and spread  values     e Loop control status  automatic or manual  and output  values  if the loop is in manual control     e Alarm function  off  alarm control  setpoints  high low  process setpoints  high low deviation setpoints and  deadband settings 
104. T     Selectable values  CURVE 1  CURVE 2  or LINEAR  Refer  to Figure 4 4                 100       80    60       Actual Output    40       20                   PID Calculation    Figure 4 4 Linear and Nonlinear Outputs    If curve 1 or 2 is selected  a PID calculation results in a low   er actual output level than the linear output requires  One  of the nonlinear curves may be used when the response of  the system to the output device is nonlinear     98 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 4  Setup    Setup Loop Alarms Menu    Use the SETUP LOOP ALARMS menu to set    e High and low process and deviation alarm limits  e Alarm outputs   e  Alarm control behavior   e Alarm deadband   e Alarm delay    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 01    ALARMS      ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Table 4 13 shows the parameters available in the SETUP  LOOP ALARMS menu     Table 4 13 Setup Loop Alarms                                     Parameter Ree  HI PROC ALARM SETPT  1000  HI PROC ALARM TYPE  OFF  HI PROC ALARM OUTPUT  NONE  DEV ALARM VALUE  5  HI DEV ALARM TYPE  OFF  HI DEV ALARM OUTPUT  NONE  LO DEV ALARM TYPE  OFF  LO DEV ALARM OUTPUT  NONE  LO PROC ALARM SETPT  0  LO PROC ALARM TYPE  OFF  LO PROC ALARM OUTPUT  NONE  ALARM DEADBAND  2  ALARM DELAY  0 SECONDS             Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 99    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    High Process Alarm Setpoint    Set the value at which the high process alarm activates 
105. T  default value 93  description 96  location 73  233  HEAT OUTPUT LIMIT TIME  default value 93  description 96  location 73  233  HEAT OUTPUT RETRANS PV  description 114  location 112  233  HEAT OUTPUT TYPE  default value 93  description 94  location 73  233  heat output  see control outputs  HEAT RETRANS MAX INP  description 114  location 112  233  HEAT RETRANS MAX OUT   description 115  location 112  233  HEAT RETRANS MIN INP  description 114  location 112  233  HEAT RETRANS MIN OUT   description 114  location 112  233  HEAT T C BRK OUT AVG  default value 93  description 97  location 73  233  HEAT COOL SPREAD  location 233  Heat Cool Thermocouple Break Out 65  HI DEV ALARM OUTPUT  default value 99  description 101  location 73  233  HI DEV ALARM TYPE  default value 99  description 101  location 73  233  HI PROC ALARM OUTPUT  default value 99  description 100  location 73  233  HI PROC ALARM SETPT  default value 99  description 100  location 73  233  HI PROC ALARM TYPE  default value 99  description 100  location 73  233  high deviation alarm  see process alarms  HP alarm code 164  humidity  controller 194  Dual DAC 207  power supply 205  Serial DAC 209  hysteresis  alarm 68  hysteresis  see spread          Doc   0600 3050 2000    Index    INPUT FILTER  default value 82  description 89  location 73  233  setting before autotuning 64  input power  see power supply  INPUT PULSE SAMPLE TIME  default value 82  description 85  location 73  233  INPUT READING OFFSET  default valu
106. TUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu is set to ON  then the con   troller sets the output power to an average of the re   cent output     e IftheHEAT COOL T C BRK OUT AVG parameter is set  to OFF  then the controller sets the output to the level  indicated by the SENSOR FAIL HT CL OUTPUT pa   rameter in the SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu     The thermocouple reversed alarm occurs if the tempera   ture goes in the opposite direction and to the opposite side  of ambient temperature than expected   for example  a loop  is heating and the measured temperature drops below the  ambient temperature     The thermocouple reversed alarm is disabled by default  To  enable this alarm  set the REVERSED T C DETECT param   eter in the SETUP LOOP INPUTS menu to ON  It may be dis   abled if false alarms occur in your application     Watlow Anafaze 65    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Thermocouple Short Alarm    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The thermocouple short alarm occurs if the process power   is on and the temperature does not rise or fall as expected    To enable the thermocouple short alarm  you must do the   following    e Choose a digital input for the PROCESS POWER DIGIN  parameter in the SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS menu    e Connect the digital input to a device that connects the  input to controller common when the process power is  on     RTD Open or RTD Shorted Alarm    The RTD open alarm occurs if the controller detects that the  positive or negative RTD lead is broken or disconnected     The RTD sho
107. TUS OUT        Selectable values  MOD  Modbus RTU   ANA  Anafaze   AB   Allen Bradley      Communications Error Checking    80    NOTE     If you selected the ANA or AB communications protocol  set  the data check algorithm for CLS200 communications     CRC  Cyclic Redundancy Check  is a more secure error  checking algorithm than BCC  but it requires more calcu   lation time and slows communications  BCC  Block Check  Character  ensures a high degree of communications integ   rity  We recommend BCC unless your application requires  CRC     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    COMMUNICATIONS    ERR CHECK   BCC    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  BCC or CRC     If you are using Anasoft  configure it with  ANAINSTL for the same error checking meth   od and baud rate set in the controller     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    AC Line Frequency    Chapter 4  Setup    Specify the ac line frequency  Since the controller reduces   the effect of power line noise on the analog measurement by  integrating the signal over the period of the ac line frequen   cy  the controller must know the frequency of power in use     You must switch power to the controller off  then back on   to make a change to this parameter take effect        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    AC LINE FREQ      60 HERTZ    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  50 or 60 Hz        Digital Output Polarity on Alarm    EPROM Information    Controller Model    Firmware Version   
108. V   dc    They cannot    source    current to a load                                                              TB50 or TB18  External   5V   dc  Power  Supply       Loads    Digital Output 1 Do not connect  Digital Output 2 to earth ground or  equipment ground  TB50 or TB18  Using Internal Power Supply Control Common     Loads  Digital Output 1           Digital Output 2    Using External Power Supply Vv    Figure 2 22 Digital Output Wiring    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Configuring Outputs    Chapter 2  Installation    Keep in mind the following points as you choose outputs for  control and alarms     e You can enable or disable the control outputs  The de   fault setting is heat outputs enabled  cool outputs dis   abled     e You can program each control output individually for  on off  time proportioning  distributed zero crossing  or  Serial DAC control     e You can individually program each control output for  direct or reverse action     e Alarm outputs other than the global alarm are non   latching     e Alarms can be suppressed during process start up and  for preprogrammed durations  See Alarm Delay on  page 103    e Alarm outputs can be configured as a group as normal   ly on  low  or normally off  high   See Digital Output  Polarity on Alarm on page 81     Control and Alarm Output Connections    NOTE     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Typically control and alarm outputs use external optically  isolated solid state relays  SSR
109. V   dc  Sensor    Situation    A flow sensor connected to the controller measures the flow  in a pipe  The sensor generates a 0 to 5V signal  The sen   sor   s output depends on its installation  Independent cali   bration measurements of the flow in the pipe indicate that  the sensor generates 0 5V at three gallons per minute   GPM  and 4 75V at 65 GPM  The calibration instruments  are accurate to within 1 gallon per minute     Setup  The sensor is connected to a loop input set up with a resis   tor voltage divider network producing 60mV at 5V     The INPUT TYPE for the loop is set to LINEAR  The calibrat   ing instrument is precise to  1 GPM  so the DISP FORMAT  is set to  999 to  3000     This table shows the input readings and the percentage  calculation from the 60mV full scale input     Table 10 3 Input Readings and Calculations       ee Sensor Reading  Percent of  Displayed    put Full Scale   FS        65 GPM 4 75  4 75V   5 00V  x 100  95 FS                   3 GPM 0 5  0 5V   5 00V  x 100  10 FS    Table 10 4 Scaling Values       Parameter Prompt Value       High Process Variable HIGH PV 65 GPM       High Sensor Reading HIGH RDG 95 0 FS       Low Process Variable LO PV 0 0 GPM       Low Sensor Reading LO RDG 10 0 FS                   Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 191    Chapter 10  Linear Scaling Examples CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Example 3  A Pulse Encoder    Situation  A pulse encoder which measures the movement of a convey   or is connected to the con
110. Win and Watview works with all  tested converters without an external 232 in   put     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 49    Chapter 2  Installation CLS200 Series User s Guide    50 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Using the CLS200    This chapter explains how to use the keypad and display to  operate the controller  Figure 3 1 shows the operator  menus and displays accessible from the front panel     To change global parameters  loop inputs  control parame   ters  outputs  and alarms using the setup menus  see Chap                                                                                                     ter 4  Setup   BACK  Power  on BACK j BACK  Bar Graph Single Loop Job   gt  Display  gt  Display  gt  Display  ENTER   A Any ENTER      Any    scHne Kee A  Scanning Scanning  Bar Graph Single Loop Secon  Display Display  RAMP MAN  SOAK BASN AUTO BACK  y Y ENTER  Manual  Manual  Coa  utomatic      Ramp Soak or Autot  ne Percentage  Mone BACK   Gode only   Figure 3 1 Operator Displays    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze    51    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200 CLS200 Series User s Guide    Front Panel    The CLS200 front panel provides a convenient interface  with the controller  You can use the front panel keys to pro   gram and operate the CLS200            RAMP  WATLOW ANAFAZE CLS200 SOAK    e Assigns and  monitors profile       PROCESS UNITS       ALARM    ACK  e Acknowledges    alarms    MAN    AUTO   a    e Changes loop output  control from automa
111. a CLS204 or  CLS208 controller with scaling resistors      e Automatic Scaling for Linear Analog Inputs  The  CLS200 series automatically scales linear inputs used  with industrial process sensors  Enter two points  and  all input values are automatically scaled in your units   Scaling resistors must be installed     e Dual Outputs  The CLS200 series includes both heat  and cool control outputs for each loop  Independent  control parameters are provided for each output     e Independently Selectable Control and Output  Modes  You can set each control output to on off  time  proportioning  Serial DAC  digital to analog convert   er   or distributed zero crossing mode  Set up to two  outputs per loop for on off  P  PI or PID control with re   verse or direct action     e Control Outputs  Set high low deviation and high   low process limits to operate digital outputs as on off  control functions or alarms     e Flexible Alarm Outputs  Independently set high   low process alarms and a high low deviation band  alarm for each loop  Alarms can activate a digital out   put by themselves  or they can be grouped with other  alarms to activate an output     e Global Alarm Output  When any alarm is triggered   the global alarm output is also triggered  and it stays  on until you acknowledge it     Watlow Anafaze 3    Chapter 1  System Overview    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    CPU Watchdog  The CLS200 series CPU watchdog  timer output notifies you of system failure  Use it to  hold a re
112. able Programmable  Read Only Memory  inside the controller     Error  The difference between the correct or desired  value and the actual value     F    Fahrenheit   The temperature scale that sets the freezing  point of water at 32   F and its boiling point at  212   F at standard atmospheric pressure  The  formula for conversion to Celsius    C   5 9 CF    32      Failed Sensor Alarm   Warns that an input sensor no longer produces  a valid signal  For example  when there are  thermocouple breaks  infrared problems or  resistance temperature detector  RTD  open or  short failures     Filter  Filters are used to handle various electrical  noise problems     Digital Filter  DF      A filter that allows the  response of a system when inputs change  unrealistically or too fast  Equivalent to a  standard resistor capacitor  RC  filter    Digital Adaptive Filter     A filter that  rejects high frequency input signal noise  noise  spikes      Heat Cool Output Filter     A filter that  slows the change in the response of the heat or  cool output  The output responds to a step  change by going to approximately 2 3 its final  value within the numbers of scans that are set     Frequency  The number of cycles over a specified period of    Watlow Anafaze 215    Glossary    time  usually measured in cycles per second   Also referred to as Hertz  Hz   The reciprocal  is called the period     G    Gain   The amount of amplification used in an electri   cal circuit  Gain can also refer to th
113. ad or use a load that can be visually verified   such as a light bulb     1  Turn on power to the controller     2  Measure the  5V   dc  supply at the TB18 or TB50   The voltage should be  4 75 to  5 25V   de      a  Connect the voltmeter   s common lead to the TB18  screw terminal 2 or TB50 screw terminal 3     b  Connect the voltmeter   s positive lead to the TB18  or TB50 screw terminal 1     Outputs  1  Turn off power to the controller     2  Disconnect any process output wiring on the output to  be tested     3  Connect a 500 Q to 100 kQ resistor between the   5V terminal  TB18 or TB50 screw terminal 1  and the  output terminal you want to test     4  Connect the voltmeter   s common lead to the output  terminal  and connect the voltmeter   s positive lead to  the  5V terminal     Restore power to the controller     If you are testing a PID control output  use the MAN   AUTO key to turn the output on  100   and off  0     When the output is off  the output voltage should be  less than 1V  When the output is on  the output volt   age should be between  3 75 and  5 25V     7  Ifyou are testing a digital output not used for control   use the MANUAL I 0 TEST menu to turn the output on  and off  See Manual I O Test on page 103     Turn off power to the controller     2  Disconnect any system wiring from the input to be    Doc   0600 3050 2000    tested     Watlow Anafaze 173    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Restore power to t
114. age signals outside the standard range  milliamp cur   rent signals or RTDs  resistors are added or replaced to  scale the signals to the standard range  These resistor can  be installed by Watlow Anafaze or by a qualified electronics  technician using scaling resistors supplied by Watlow  Anafaze    Figure 9 6 shows the input circuit for one differential  ana   log input  See CLS204 and CLS208 Current Inputs on page  181 through CLS204 and CLS208 RTDs and Thermistors  on page 183 for specific instructions and resistor values for  voltage  current and RTD inputs     When adding your own scaling resistors to  the controller  for voltage and RTD inputs  you will have to carefully remove one of the  RC resistors in order to install the resistor  listed in the table     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    RC  Voltage                    IN  e    v     gt     Internal RP   5V   dc  To CLS200  Analog Reference s RD Circuitry  Input  Terminal  RC  RTD   IN  e   VVV kd  gt     Com e  V    Figure 9 6 CLS204 and CLS208 Input Circuit    CLS204 and CLS208 Current Inputs    For each current input on a CLS204 or CLS208 controller  you must install a resistor  The value of the resistor must  be correct for the expected input range  Install the resistor  in the listed resistor pack  RP  location  Note the resistor   pack locations have three through holes  Install the resis   tor as shown in the illustration below   
115. al to a signal that is proportional to the input  in some way     Direct Action  An output control action in which an increase  in the process variable  causes an increase in  the output  Cooling applications usually use  direct action     Direct Current  DC   An electric current that flows in one direction     Distributed Zero Crossing  DZC    A form of digital output control in which the  output on off state is calculated for every ac  line cycle  Power is switched at the zero cross   which reduces electrical noise  See also Zero  Cross     E    Earth Ground   A metal rod  usually copper  that provides an  electrical path to the earth  to prevent or  reduce the risk of electrical shock     EIA TIA  See Serial Communications     Electrical Noise  See Noise     Electromagnetic Interference  EMI    Electrical and magnetic noise imposed on a  system  There are many possible causes  such  as switching ac power on inside the sine wave   EMI can interfere with the operation of con   trols and other devices     Electrical Mechanical Relays  See Relay  Electromechanical     Emissivity    The ratio of radiation emitted from a surface  compared to radiation emitted from a black     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Glossary    body at the same temperature     Engineering Units   Selectable units of measure  such as degrees  Celsius and Fahrenheit  pounds per square  inch  newtons per meter  gallons per minute   liters per minute  cubic feet per minute or  cubic meters per minute     EPROM  Eras
116. alid     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze    59       Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    System Alarms    Job Display    60    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    When a system alarm occurs  the global alarm output turns  on and an alarm message appears on the display  The mes   sage continues to be displayed until the error condition is  removed and the alarm is acknowledged  The CLS200 can  display the following system alarms     e BATTERY DEAD  See Battery Dead on page 168     e LOW POWER  See Low Power on page 168   e AW    See Ambient Warning on page 168   e H W FAILURE  AMBIENT  See H W Ambient Failure on page 169   e H W FAILURE  GAIN  See H W Gain or Offset Failure on page 170     H W FAILURE  OFFSET  See H W Gain or Offset Failure on page 170     The job display appears only if   e You have enabled JOB SELECT DIG INPUTS   See  Load Setup From Job on page 75        and      e You have selected a job from the job load menu   After loading a job using the LOAD SETUP FROM JOB  menu  the job display shows you the following screen        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    JOB 3 RUNNING          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        If parameters are modified while the job is running  this  screen will display     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    JOB 3 RUNNING  DATA MODIFIED    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        If the job was loaded using digital inputs  the display  shows        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  JOB 3 RUNNING  REMOTELY LOADED    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT                 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3
117. ameters in the SETUP LOOP CONTROL  PARAMS menu  Furthermore  a unique set of control de   faults are asserted whenever the COOL OUTPUT parame   ter on the SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu is changed   Table 5 1 through Table 5 3 on page 109 list the default pa   rameter settings for each cool output curve     Changing the cool output curve parameter  will change control parameter settings to de   faults for that particular cool output curve     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 5  Extruder    Table 5 1 Default Control Parameters for Fan Cool Output       Parameter Default Value  HEAT CONTROL PB   HEAT CONTROL TI        50  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting          500 sec repeat  HEAT CONTROL TD  125 sec  HEAT CONTROL FILTER 6    COOL CONTROL PB   COOL CONTROL TI   COOL CONTROL TD  ene  COOL CONTROL FILTER    4    10  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting       0 sec repeat          Table 5 2 Default Control Parameters for Oil Cool Output       Parameter Default Value  HEAT CONTROL PB   HEAT CONTROL TI        50  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting             500 sec repeat  HEAT CONTROL TD  425 sec  HEAT CONTROL FILTER 6       COOL CONTROL PB   COOL CONTROL TI   COOL CONTROL TD  A  COOL CONTROL FILTER        35  for J type thermocouple  depends on Input Type setting       300 sec repeat             Table 5 3 Default Control Parameters for H2O Cool Output    Parameter Default Value  HEAT
118. and con   troller must be set the same  CRC or BCC      e Hardware protocol  PC and controller must use the  same protocol  or a converter must be used  The con   troller is typically configured for EIA TIA 232 when it  is shipped  See Changing Communications on page  179 to change between EJA TIA 232 and ETA TIA 485   To communicate with more than one controller  or  when more than 50 feet of cable is required  use EIA   TIA 485  Even for a single controller  you may use  EIA TIA 485 and an optically isolating converter to  eliminate ground loops     e Converter  Make sure that the EIA TIA 232 to 485  converter is powered  configured and wired correctly     e Cables  Check continuity by placing a resistor across  each pair of wires and measuring the resistance with  an ohmmeter at the other end     Many PC communications ports have their common wires  connected to chassis ground  Once connected to the control   ler  this can provide a path to ground for current from the  process that can enter the controller through a sensor  such  as a thermocouple   This creates a ground loop that can af   fect communications and other controller functions  To  eliminate a ground loop  either use an optically isolated  communications adapter or take measures to ensure that  sensors and all other connections to the controller are iso   lated and not conducting current into the unit     Watlow Anafaze 175    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    Software 
119. annel you are testing     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 171    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    Earth Grounding    Checking Control Outputs    172    If you suspect a problem with the ac ground or a ground loop     e Measure for ac voltage between ac neutral and panel  chassis ground  If ac voltage above 2V   ac  is ob   served  then there may be a problem with the ac power  wiring  This should be corrected per local electrical  codes     e With ac power on  measure for ac voltage that may be  present between control panels    chassis grounds  Any  ac voltage above 2V   ac  may indicate problems with  the ac ground circuit     e Check for ac voltage on thermocouples with the heater  power on  A control output providing power to the  heaters will increase the ac voltage if there is heater  leakage and an improper grounding circuit  Measure  from either positive or negative thermocouple lead to  ac ground  AC voltage above 2V   ac  may indicate the  ground lead is not connected to the CLS200 TB2  ground terminal     If the above tests indicate proper ac grounding but the con   troller is indicating incorrect temperatures or process read   ings    e Verify which type of sensor is installed and that the  INPUT TYPE parameter is set accordingly    e Foran RTD or linear voltage or current input  check  that the correct input scaling resistors are installed   page 180  and check the input scaling parameter set   tings  page 86     e If
120. ar   acter     D    DAC  See Digital to Analog Converter     Data Logging   A method of recording a process variable over  a period of time  Used to review process perfor   mance     DC  See Direct Current     Deadband   The range through which a variation of the  input produces no noticeable change in the  output  In the deadband  specific conditions  can be placed on control output actions  Opera   tors select the deadband  It is usually above  the heating proportional band and below the  cooling proportional band     Default Parameters  The programmed instructions that are perma   nently stored in the microprocessor software     Derivative Control  D    The last term in the PID algorithm  Action  that anticipated the rate of change of the pro   cess  and compensates to minimize overshoot  and undershoot  Derivative control is an  instantaneous change of the control output in  the same direction as the proportional error   This is caused by a change in the process vari   able  PV  that decreases over the time of the  derivative  TD   The TD is in units of seconds     Deutsche Industrial Norms  DIN     Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    A set of technical  scientific and dimensional  standards developed in Germany  Many DIN  standards have worldwide recognition     Deviation Alarm  Warns that a process has exceeded or fallen  below a certain range around the setpoint     Digital to Analog Converter  DAC    A device that converts a numerical input sig   n
121. ar Graph Display    The ramp soak mode is also displayed on the bar graph dis   play             Symbol    PROCESS UNITS    L lt an  lt  08  ROMA    STATUS OUT        Loop Number       SETPOINT       Ramp Soak Mode    Table 7 5 describes the control status symbols used for  loops with ramp soak profiles assigned     146 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Time Remaining Display    Cycle Number Display    Set Mode Display    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Loop Number    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Table 7 5   Ramp Soak Control Status Symbols                            Seal Description  R A profile is unning   H A profile is holding  S A profile is in ready stat    0 A profile is in tole ance hold   W A profile is in t igger wait     From the single loop display  press the RAMP SOAK key  once    This screen shows how much time remains to complete the  profile  All screens that are accessed by pressing RAMP   SOAK key have the same information on the top line     Profile Letter Number of Segments  Current Segment in Profile            Ramp Soak Mode        04 A SEG10 20 R  TIM REM  32 11    ALARM SETPOINT OUT               STATUS          Time Remaining    From the single loop display  press the RAMP SOAK key  twice  This screen displays the number of times the profile  has run out of the total number of cycles  In this example   the ramp soak profile is on the 10th of 15 cycles to be per   formed     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    04 A SEG10 20 R    CYCLE NR  10 
122. ariable      CLS200 Series User   s Guide    On off control is the simplest way to control a process  The  controller turns an output on or off when the process vari   able reaches limits around the desired setpoint  This limit  is adjustable  Watlow Anafaze controllers use an adjust   able spread     For example  if the setpoint is 1 000   F and the spread is  20   F  the heat output switches on when the process vari   able drops below 980   F and off when the process rises  above 1 000    F  A process using on off control cycles around  the setpoint  Figure 8 1 illustrates this example              Heat Off Heat Off  ONS PS ENG Set A   Setpoint  a 2 1 000   F  Setpoint   Spread  On ee Oa oa 980   F  I I I  l I I  Off l             Figure 8 1 On Off Control    Proportional control eliminates cycling by increasing or de   creasing the output proportionally with the process vari   able   s deviation from the setpoint     The magnitude of proportional response is defined by the  proportional band  Outside this band  the output is either  100  or 0   Within the proportional band the output pow   er is proportional to the process variable   s deviation from  the setpoint    For example  if the setpoint is 1 000   F and the proportional  band is 20   F  the output is    e 0  when the process variable is 1 000   F or above   e 50  when the process variable is 990   F   e 75  when the process variable is 985   F   e 100  when the process variable is 980   F or below  However  a proc
123. arm occurs or when the OUTPUT  OVERRIDE DIG INPUT  page 77  becomes active on a loop  that is in automatic control  that loop goes to manual con   trol at the percent power output set here     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SENSOR FAIL          HT OUTPUT   0     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0 to 100            When a sensor fails or the override input is    detected  both the heat and cool outputs are  set to their fail settings  In most applications   SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT and SENSOR  FAIL CL OUTPUT should be set to 0      Do not rely solely on the sensor fail alarm to    adjust the output in the event of a sensor fail   ure  If the loop is in manual control when a  failed sensor alarm occurs  the output is not  adjusted  Install independent external safety  devices that will shut down the system if a  failure occurs     Heat or Cool Thermocouple Break Output Average    Doc   0600 3050 2000    If you set this parameter to ON and a thermocouple break  occurs  a loop set to automatic control status will go to man   ual mode at a percentage equal to the average output prior  to the break     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT T C BRK          OUT AVG   OFF       ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable range  ON or OFF    Watlow Anafaze 97    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    Heat or Cool Linearity    Select an output curve  For a nonlinear process  select  CURVE lor CURVE 2        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  01 HEAT OUTPUT   LINEAR    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OU
124. arms or  ramp soak events   2 Tf you install a Watlow Anafaze Serial DAC  the controller uses  digital output 34  terminal 10  for a clock line  You cannot use out   put 34 for anything else when you have a Serial DAC installed    42 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Analog Outputs    Wiring the Dual DAC    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 2  Installation    Analog outputs can be provided by using a Dual DAC or Se   rial DAC module to convert the open collector outputs from  the controller  Use multicolored stranded shielded cable for  analog outputs  Analog outputs generally use a twisted  pair wiring  The following sections describe how to connect  the Dual DAC and Serial DAC modules to power the con   troller outputs and the load     A Dual DAC module includes two identical circuits  Each  can convert a distributed zero cross  DZC  signal from the  controller to a voltage or current signal  Watlow Anafaze  strongly recommends using a power supply separate from  the controller supply to power the Dual DAC  Using a sep   arate power supply isolates the controller   s digital logic cir   cuits and analog measurement circuits from the frequently  noisy devices that take the analog signal from the Dual  DAC     Several Dual DAC modules may be powered by one power  supply  Consult the Specifications chapter for the Dual  DAC   s power requirements  Also note in the specifications  that the Dual DAC does not carry the same industry ap   provals
125. arts     Up to 20 segments per profile  The controller can  store up to 17 profiles  each with up to 20 segments     Multiple profiles run independently  Each loop  can run a different profile or the same profile can be  run independently on more than one loop     Up to two triggers per segment  Triggers are digi   tal inputs that can be programmed to start and hold  segments based on the trigger   s digital state  You can  use any one of the eight digital inputs for triggers  You  can also use the same trigger for more than one seg   ment or more than one profile     Up to four events per segment  Digital outputs con   trolled by the ramp soak profile  Events outputs are  set at the end of a segment  You can use any of the dig   ital outputs that are not used for control or for the Se   rial DAC clock     Tolerance hold ensures time at temperature  Set  a limit on how far the process variable can vary above  or below setpoint  The profile clock only runs when the  process variable is within the limit    Tolerance alarm indicates process not tracking  setpoint  Set a maximum amount of time for the tol   erance hold to wait for a process deviation before noti   fying the operator  The operator can acknowledge the  alarm and proceed if desired     User configurable time base  Program profiles to  run for hours and minutes or for minutes and seconds   Repeatable profiles  Set any profile to repeat from 1  to 99 times or continuously    Fast setup for similar profiles  Set up one
126. asuring  the load   s temperature     e The deviation limit is too narrow     e The system is so poorly tuned that the temperature is  cycling about setpoint by more than the alarm limit     NOTE  In cooling applications  similar issues cause  high process and high deviation alarms     In a heating application  a high process alarm or high devi    ation alarm may indicate one of the following    e The setpoint and high process limit have been lowered  and the system has not had time to cool to within the  new alarm limit    e The control status is set to manual and the heat out   put is greater than 0     e The load has decreased such that the temperature has  risen    e The heater is full on due to a hardware failure     e The system is so poorly tuned that the temperature is  cycling about setpoint by more than the alarm limit     Resetting a Process or Deviation Alarm    Your response to an alarm depends upon the alarm type  setting  as explained in Table 9 2 below     Table 92 Operator Response to Alarms    Alarm  Type Operator Response  The operator does not need to do anything   Control The alarm clears automatically when the pro   cess variable returns within limits        Acknowledge the alarm by pressing ALARM  ACK on the controller or by using software   Alarm The alarm clears after the process variable  returns within the limits and the operator has  acknowledged it                 Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 165    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfigur
127. ately  See Figure 6 2                 100   Maximum  Q Output  D      A a    Minimum    Output 7   ben i           0       Minimum Maximum  Input Input    Input Process Variable    Figure 6 2 Linear Scaling of Process Variable  for Retransmit    Enter the output value  0 to 100   which corresponds to  the maximum input     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS    MAX OUT   100     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        The output will never go above the this maximum output  percentage  regardless of how high the process variable  goes     Selectable values  0 to 100     Process Variable Retransmit Example  Data Logging    Doc   0600 3050 2000    The CLS200 controls the temperature of a furnace  The  thermocouple in one of the zones is connected to the con   troller and is used for closed loop PID control  An analog re   corder data logging system is also in place  and a recording  of the process temperature is required  The recorder input  is a linear 4 to 20 mA   dc  signal representing a process  variable range of 0 to 1000   F     Watlow Anafaze 115    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    116    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                          Loop 1  Input  Process  Variable Loop 1 PID Output  a    Loop 2 PID Output  F  urnace ciei  Heater  MWA Serial  DAC  Power  Controller  To Data  Logger    Figure 6 3 Application Using Process Vari   able Retransmit    To set up this application  you would do the following     1  First  set up the standard co
128. ational  Do not exceed 5V     dc   10  mA  dc  rating for the watchdog output  The output is low   on  when the microprocessor is operating  when it stops  operating  the output goes high  off     Figure 2 25 and Figure 2 26 show the recommended circuit  for the watchdog timer output for the TB50 and the TB18     TB50            5V   dc      Terminal 1  SSR    Watchdog Timer     Terminal 6     Figure 2 25 TB50 Watchdog Timer Output                      TB18      SV  dc  x   Terminal 1  SSR             Watchdog Timer     Terminal 3     Figure 2 26 TB18 Watchdog Timer Output                   All digital inputs are transistor transistor logic  TTL  level  inputs referenced to control common and the internal  5V  power supply of the CLS200     When an input is connected to the controller common  the  input is considered on  Otherwise  the input is considered    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    External Switching Devices    Chapter 2  Installation    off  Most features that use the digital inputs can be user   configured to activate when an input is either on or off     In the off state  internal 10 k resistors pull the digital in    puts high to 5V   dc  with respect to the controller com    mon    Table 2 4 Digital Inputs States and Values  Stored in the Controller                      State   Value Description  Off High Open circuit  On Low Digital Input connected to  controller common       To ensure that the inputs are reliably switched 
129. atlow Anafaze divide analog input  voltages such that the controller sees a  10 to 60 mV signal  on the loop     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    CLS204 and CLS208    CH IN  e    Chapter 2  Installation         Device with          CH IN  e      Voltage     Output          CLS216  CH IN               Device with       Com e    Voltage     Output             Figure 2 18 Linear Voltage Signal Connections    Current Input Connections    This input type requires scaling resistors  Special input re   sistors installed at Watlow Anafaze for analog current sig   nals are such that the controller sees a  10 to 60 mV signal  across its inputs for the loop     CLS204 and CLS208                      CH IN           Device with  Current       CHIN  e       CLS216          e Output                CH IN  e       Device with  Current       Com Ref Com e        Figure 2 19 Linear Current Signal Connections          e Output          NOTE  When mixing current inputs with low voltage  inputs  thermocouples or voltage inputs  lt 1V   to a CLS216  connect the current signal to the  IN  and Ref Com terminals  When no low   voltage sensors are used  connect current in   puts to the IN  and Com terminals on TB1   For all inputs to a CLS204 or CLS208  con   nect the sensors to the IN  and Com termi     nals     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze    Chapter 2  Installation    Pulse Input Connections    34    NOTE     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The CLS200 ca
130. ble signal degrada   tion     Watlow Anafaze 219    Glossary    U    Upscale Break Protection   A form of break detection for burned out ther   mocouples  Signals the operator that the ther   mocouple has burned out     Undershoot  The amount by which a process variable falls  below the setpoint before it stabilizes     V    Volt  V   The unit of measure for electrical potential   voltage or electromotive force  EMF   See also  Voltage     Voltage  V    The difference in electrical potential between  two points in a circuit  It   s the push or pres   sure behind current flow through a circuit   One volt  V  is the difference in potential  required to move one coulomb of charge  between two points in a circuit  consuming one  joule of energy  In other words  one volt  V  is  equal to one ampere of current  I  flowing  through one ohm of resistance  R   or V   IR     Z    Zero Cross   Action that provides output switching only at  or near the zero voltage crossing points of the  ac sine wave     220 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Index    A    A control status symbol 56  AC LINE FREQ  default value 74  description 81  location 73  233  agency compliance  controller 193  power supply 205  Serial DAC 210  ALARM ACK key  acknowledging alarms 59 60  description 54  does not work 170  ALARM DEADBAND  default value 99  description 102  location 73  233  ALARM DELAY  default value 99  description 103  location 
131. d  a 50 terminal block  TB50      Table 11 1 Agency Approvals   Compliance       CE Directive    Electromagnetic Compatibility  EMC   Directive 89 336 EEC       UL and C UL       UL 916  Standard for Energy Manage   ment Equipment File E177240          Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze    193    Chapter 11  Specifications CLS200 Series User s Guide    CLS200 Processor Physical Specifications    Table 11 2 Environmental Specifications       Storage Temperature  20 to 60   C       Operating Temperature 0 to 50  C       Humidity 10 to 95  non condensing       The controller is for indoor    Environment  use only             Table 11 3 Physical Dimensions                Weight 1 98 Ibs 0 9 kg   Length  8 0 inches 203 mm  Width 3 78 inches 96 mm  Height 1 96 inches 50 mm               Without SCSI connector or with TB18 option        Figure 11 1 CLS200 Processor Module  Dimensions    194 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 11  Specifications    Table 11 4 Processor with Straight SCSI                            Length 9 6 inches 244 mm  Width 3 78 inches 96 mm  Height 1 96 inches 50 mm  1 0 in  7 0 in  1 6 in    25 mm   178 mm   41 mm    lt  p                                        1 96 in    50 mm   Figure 11 2 CLS200 Clearances with  Straight SCSI Cable  Table 11 5 Processor with Right Angle SCSI  Length 8 6 inches 218 mm  Width 3 78 inches 96 mm  Height 1 96 inches 50 mm  1 0 in  i  60 in   In 7 0 in  end  1 96 in    50 mm        Figu
132. d  alarms  See Chapter 4  Setup for information on loop  setup     132 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Ramp Soak       This chapter covers setup and operation of ramp soak pro   files in CLS200 series controllers     These features are available in controllers that have the  optional ramp soak firmware installed     The ramp soak feature turns your controller into a power   ful and flexible batch controller  Ramp soak lets you pro   gram the controller to change a process setpoint in a preset  pattern over time  This preset pattern  or temperature  profile  consists of several segments  During a segment   the temperature goes from the previous segment   s setpoint  to the current segment   s setpoint   e Ifthe current segment   s setpoint is higher or lower  than the previous segment   s setpoint  it is called a  ramp segment     e Ifthe current segment   s setpoint is the same as the  previous segment   s setpoint  it is called a soak seg           ment   Profile  K   Q  mie Soak  S Q  a   K     D  amp     O  Q  A    gt     Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3    Figure 7 1 Sample Ramp Soak Profile    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 133    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Features    134    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Ramp soak in the CLS200 includes the following features     Ready segment sets loop up for profile  Ready  segment can control at setpoint until profile needs to  run  Ready segment events set all available event out   puts to desired states before profile st
133. d units  Control outputs associated with failed  sensors are set to the value of the SENSOR FAIL HT CL  OUTPUT   parameter  default  0    The alarm code blinks  and displays cannot be changed until the alarm has been  acknowledged  Once the alarm is acknowledged  the alarm  code stops blinking  When the condition that caused the  alarm is corrected  the alarm messages disappear        Alarm Code       Loop Number i       LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 180   F  LP 180AUTO    ALARM __ SETPOINT          STATUS OUT              Figure 3 6 Single Loop Display with a Process  Alarm          4  Alarm Code    PROCESS UNITS  T C BREAK  25MAN 0    OUT     03    Failed Sensor  Description    FS    ALARM _ SETPOINT       STATUS          Figure 3 7 Failed Sensor Alarm in the Single  Loop Display    Alarms that still exist but have been acknowledged are dis   played on the Bar Graph display  A letter or symbol indi   cates the alarm condition  See Table 3 3 on page 59 for a  full list of alarm codes  failed sensor messages and alarm  symbols        Open  Thermocouple  on Loop 1          Low Process  or Low Deviation  on Loop 5    DSQP PROCESS y   lt     lt 08  AAAA MAMA    ALARM SETPOINT    O1 gt F        OUT        STATUS             58    Figure 3 8 Alarm Symbols in the Bar Graph  Display    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Table 3 3 shows the symbols used in each form of the alarm    display     Table 3 3    Alarm Type and S
134. e 82  description 84  location 73  233  values 85  INPUT SCALING HI PV  default value 82  description 88  location 73  233  scaling parameters 86  INPUT SCALING HI RDG  default value 82  description 88  location 73  233  scaling parameters 86  INPUT SCALING LO PV  default value 82  description 88  location 73  233  scaling parameters 86  INPUT SCALING LO RDG  default value 82  description 89  location 73  233  scaling parameters 86  INPUT TYPE  default value 82  description 83  effect on ramp soak parameters 144  location 73  233  values 83  INPUT UNITS  default value 82  description 84  location 73  233  inputs  analog  see sensor inputs  current  see current inputs  digital  see digital inputs  filter 89  pulse  see pulse inputs  RTD  see RTD  scaling resistors 180 186  sensor  see sensor inputs  setup parameters 82 89  specifications 200 202  thermocouple  see thermocouples  voltage  see voltage inputs  wiring  see installation  installation 11 49  alarm wiring 37  clearance 13 15  195  communications 45 49    Watlow Anafaze 225    Index    control output wiring 37  controller 13 16  CPU watchdog timer 38  digital output wiring 35 36  Dual DAC 19 20  environment 12  ground loops  see ground loops  location 12  noise suppression  see noise  overview 11  panel hole dimensions 15  panel thickness 15  power supply 18 19  25 27  reference voltage terminals 32  sensor input wiring 29 34  Serial DAC 19 20  TB50 16 18  27  testing 28 29  tie wrapping cables 35  tools 13  torque fo
135. e Input scaling and calibration    e Input filtering                                              Table 4 5 Setup Loop Input   Parameter Default Value  INPUT TYPE  J  LOOP NAME  01  INPUT UNITS    F  INPUT READING OFFSET  0   F  REVERSED T C DETECT     OFF  INPUT PULSE SAMPLE TIME   1  DISP FORMAT 2  999 TO 3000  INPUT SCALING HI PV  1000  INPUT SCALING HI RDG  100 0  FS  INPUT SCALING LO PV 2 0  INPUT SCALING LO RDG  0 0  FS  INPUT FILTER  3 SCANS             1 This parameter is available only for the pulse loop  loop 5 on  CLS204  loop 9 on CLS208  loop 17 on CLS216      2 These parameters are available only if LINEAR is selected for    INPUT TYPE     3 These parameter is available only if INPUT TYPE is set to one of    the thermocouple or RTD options     Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Input Type    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Specify the type of input sensor used on this loop    e Thermocouple type J  K  T  S  R  B or E    e RTITD1orRTD2    e Linear input    e Skip  an input type available for unused loops      Alarms are not detected  and the scanning display  does not show loops that are set to SKIP     e Pulse input  available only for loop 5 on CLS204  loop  9 on CLS208 or loop 17 on CLS216      LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT    TYPE   J T C    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  See Table 4 6        Table 4 6 CLS200 Input Types and Ranges       Input    Type Input Range       J T C  350 to  1 40
136. e Propor   tional  P  mode of PID     Global Alarm   Alarm associated with a global digital output  that is cleared directly from a controller or  through a user interface     Global Digital Outputs   A pre selected digital output for each specific  alarm that alerts the operator to shut down  critical processes when an alarm condition  occurs     Ground   An electrical line with the same electrical  potential as the surrounding earth  Electrical  systems are usually grounded to protect people  and equipment from shocks due to malfunc   tions  Also referred to a    safety ground        H    Hertz  Hz   Frequency  measured in cycles per second     High Deviation Alarm   Warns that the process is above setpoint  but  below the high process variable  It can be used  as either an alarm or control function     High Power    As defined by Watlow Anafaze  Any voltage  above 24 Vac or Vdc and any current level  above 50 mAac or mAdc     High Process Alarm   A signal that is tied to a set maximum value  that can be used as either an alarm or control  function     High Process Variable  See Process Variable  PV      High Reading  An input level that corresponds to the high    216 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    process value  For linear inputs  the high read   ing is a percentage of the full scale input  range  For pulse inputs  the high reading is  expressed in cycles per second  Hz      Infrared  IR    A region of the electromagnetic spectrum with  wavelengths ranging
137. e Reset the tolerance alarm timer  e Clear the tolerance alarm    If the process variable does not return within the tolerance   the tolerance alarm will recur after the tolerance alarm  time elapses again     If the alarm persists you may want to reset the profile     To reset a profile  follow these steps     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop you want  to reset     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key three times to see the  SET MODE parameter     3  Press the NO key  The following screen will display     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 A SEGO1 05 R    SET MODE  RESET    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        4  PressYES to reset the profile  and then ENTER to con   firm your choice   When you reset a profile  the following happens     e The profile returns to the ready segment  The setpoint  goes to the ready setpoint  and the event outputs go to  the states you specified for the READY EVENT OUTPUT  parameter in the READY SEGMENT EDIT EVENTS sub   menu  See Ready Segment Edit Events on page 139      Watlow Anafaze 151    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak CLS200 Series User s Guide    e The controller shows you the ASSIGN R S PROFILE  screen in case you would like to assign a different pro   file to the loop or select NONE to unassign the profile     In Case of a Power Failure    If the power fails or the controller is otherwise powered  down while running a ramp soak profile  by default the pro   file is set to the START mode when power is restored   Ifthe POWER UP OUTPUT STATUS parameter i
138. e alarm     If the error message remains  check the ambient air  temperature near the controller  Adjust ventilation   cooling or heating to ensure that the temperature  around the controller is 0 to 50   C  If the unit is func   tioning correctly  the error will clear automatically  when the ambient temperature is within range and  the alarm has been acknowledged     Remove any connections to the 5V   dc  reference   TB1 18  on the back of the controller  If this corrects  the problem  there was an error in the wiring  You  may need to consult technical support to determine  the correct wiring     If the ambient temperature is within range and the er   ror persists     Watlow Anafaze 169    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    NOTE     H W Gain or Offset Failure    NOTE     Keys Do Not Respond    170    a  Turn the power to the controller off   b  Remove the boards from the CLS200 housing   c   Reseat the boards and turn power on     5  If the error persists  make a record of the settings   then perform a NO key reset  See NO Key Reset on  page 176     6  Ifthe error is not cleared  contact your supplier for fur   ther troubleshooting guidelines  See Returning Your  Unit on page 164     If the controller has failed  it is likely that it    was damaged by excessive voltage or noise   Before replacing the controller  troubleshoot  for noise and ground loops     If the controller displays H W GAIN FAILURE or  H W OFFSET FAILURE     1  Ackno
139. e in the process variable  causes a decrease in the output  Conversely  with direct ac   tion an increase in the process variable causes an increase  in the output  Heating applications normally use reverse  action and cooling applications usually use direct action     Setting Up and Tuning PID Loops    NOTE     After installing your control system  tune each control loop  and then set the loop to automatic control  When tuning a  loop  choose PID parameters that will best control the pro   cess  This section gives PID values for a variety of heating  and cooling applications     Tuning is a slow process  After adjusting a    loop  allow about 20 minutes for the change  to take effect     Proportional Band  PB  Settings    Table 8 1 shows proportional band settings for various  temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius     Table 8 1   Proportional Band Settings                                                              Setpoint   PB      Setpoint   PB      Setpoint   PB   100 to 99 20 1100 to 1199   75 2200 to 2299   135  100 to 199 20 1200 to 1299   80 2300 to 2399   140  200 to 299 30 1300 to 1899   85 2400 to 2499   145  300 to 399 35 1400 to 1499   90 2500 to 2599   150  400 to 499 40 1500 to 1599   95 2600 to 2699   155  500 to 599 45 1600 to 1699   100 2700 to 2799   160  600 to 699 50 1700 to 1799   105 2800 to 2899   165  700 to 799 55 1800 to 1899   110 2900 to 2999   170  800 to 899 60 1900 to 1999   120 3000 to 3099   175  900 to 999 65 2000 to 2099   125 310
140. e is already installed and wired     Unplug the two terminal blocks     Depending on the installation  you may need to un   mount the Dual DAC module before proceeding  Re   move the four screws from the end plate on the  opposite side of the module from the terminal blocks     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 187    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    13     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    If necessary  remove the two mounting screws holding  the loosened end plate in place     Slide the board out of the housing     Set the jumpers for the two outputs as desired  See  Table 9 16     Replace the board such that the connectors extend  through the opposite end plate  The board fits in the  third slot from the bottom     Reconnect the two terminal blocks to the DAC1 and  DAC2 connectors       Replace the end plate  end plate screws and  if neces     sary  mounting screws     Check the wire connections to the DAC1 and DAC2  terminal blocks       Ifnecessary  change the wiring connections to the cor     rect configuration for the new output type  See Wiring  the Dual DAC on page 43     Restore system power     Configuring Serial DAC Outputs    The Serial DAC   s voltage and current output is jumper se   lectable  Refer to Figure 9 9  Configure the jumpers as in   dicated on the Serial DAC label           Jumper    Figure 9 9 Serial DAC Voltage Current Jump     188    er Positions    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000          Linear Scaling Examples    This chapter
141. e range     Spread   In heat cool applications  the     difference  between heat and cool  Also known as process  deadband  See also Deadband     Stability   The ability of a device to maintain a constant  output with the application of a constant  input     T    T C Extension Wire  A grade of wire used between the measuring  junction and the reference junction of a ther   mocouple  Extension wire and thermocouple  wire have similar properties  but extension  wire is less costly     TD  Timed Derivative   The derivative function     Thermistor   A temperature sensing device made of semi   conductor material that exhibits a large  change in resistance for a small change in tem   perature  Thermistors usually have negative  temperature coefficients  although they are  also available with positive temperature coeffi   cients     Thermocouple  T C    A temperature sensing device made by joining  two dissimilar metals  This junction produces  an electrical voltage in proportion to the differ   ence in temperature between the hot junction   sensing junction  and the lead wire connection  to the instrument  cold junction      TI  Timed Integral   The Integral term     Transmitter   A device that transmits temperature data from  either a thermocouple or RTD by way of a two   wire loop  The loop has an external power sup   ply  The transmitter acts as a variable resistor  with respect to its input signal  Transmitters  are desirable when long lead or extension  wires produce unaccepta
142. e ratio control parameters with loop  number 2 as the ratio loop     Enter the master loop which will provide the output to the  internal controller setpoint calculation for the ratio loop  setpoint        LOOP PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL    MSTR LOOP  NONE    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any loop except the loop currently se   lected  in this case  loop 02   Choose NONE for no ratio con   trol     Enter the lowest allowable setpoint for the ratio loop  This  minimum setpoint overrides any ratio calculation calling  for a lower setpoint  This value is expressed in the same en   gineering units as the ratio loop   s process variable        LOOP PROCESS UNITS       02 RATIO CONTROL    MIN SP  25    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value from the minimum value of  the ratio loop   s process variable to its maximum value     Enter the highest allowable setpoint for the ratio loop  This  maximum setpoint overrides any ratio calculation calling    Watlow Anafaze 125    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Control Ratio    Setpoint Differential    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    for a higher setpoint  This value is expressed in the same  engineering units as the ratio loop   s process variable        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL       MAX SP  25    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value from the minimum value of  the ratio loop   s process variable to its maximum value     Enter the multiplier
143. e set   point and process variable differ by more than the de   viation setting  regardless of whether the process vari   able has been within the deviation band  This allows  you to use boost control upon power up and setpoint  changes    Global Alarm    The CLS200 comes equipped with a global alarm output   The global output is activated if one or more of the follow   ing conditions occurs    e Asystem alarm occurs  or    e A failed sensor alarm occurs and is unacknowledged   or    68 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Ramp Soak    Doc   0600 3050 2000    NOTE     Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    e A process alarm occurs and is unacknowledged  The    global alarm occurs only if the alarm type is set to    ALARM in the SETUP LOOP ALARMS menu   The global    alarm does not occur if the alarm function is set to  CONTROL      The global alarm output stays active until all alarms have    been acknowledged     When the global alarm output is active  it conducts current  to the controller   s de common  When the global alarm out     put is not active  it does not conduct current     You cannot configure any parameters for the    global alarm  The active state of the global  alarm output is NOT affected by the DIG OUT  POLARITY ON ALARM polarity parameter in the  SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS menu     If you have a controller without the Ramp Soak option   pressing the RAMP SOAK key has no effect     If you have a controller with this option installed  s
144. e values  0   00 to 999  59  hours and minutes or  minutes and seconds  depending on the selected time base      Enter the ending setpoint for the segment you are editing   For aramp  the setpoint changes steadily over the segment  time from the end setpoint of the previous segment to the   value set here  For a soak  set the value here equal to the   end setpoint of the previous segment        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  C SEGMENT 5  SEG SETPT  OFF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values   999 to 3276  or OFF  no output dur   ing segment   See Setpoints and Tolerances for Various In   put Types on page 144     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Edit Segment Events    NOTE     Segment Event Output    Segment Events Output States    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    You can assign up to four digital outputs  or events  to each  segment  When the segment ends  the outputs you select  are set to the state you specify  Press YES to select outputs  and specify their states        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  A SEGMENT 5  EDIT SEG EVENTS     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Press NO to advance to the EDIT SEG TRGGRS parameter              Events are set at the end of segments  If you  want a segment to start with an event  pro   gram the event in the previous segment  You  can also create a segment with zero time pre   ceding the segment during which you want  the event on     Select a digital output for the event  Use a digital out
145. ead screwdriver   e 1 8 in   3 mm  flathead screwdriver for wiring  e Multimeter    Mount the controller before you mount the terminal block  or do any wiring  The controller   s placement affects place   ment and wiring considerations for the other components  of your system     Ensure there is enough clearance for mounting brackets   terminal blocks  and cable and wire connections  the con   troller extends up to 7 0 inches  178 mm  behind the panel  face and the screw brackets extend 0 5 inch  13 mm  above  and below it  If using a straight SCSI cable  allow for an ad   ditional 1 6 inches  41 mm  beyond the terminal block  If  using a right angle SCSI cable  allow an additional 0 6 inch   15 mm    See Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 3      Watlow Anafaze 13    Chapter 2  Installation CLS200 Series User s Guide    1 0 inch 7 0 inches 1 6 inch   25 mm   178 mm   41           oO     Figure 2 2 Clearance with Straight SCSI Cable    1 0 inch 7 0 inches 0 6 inch  7          Figure 2 3 Clearance with Right Angle SCSI  Cable    14 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation         Maximum Panel Thickness  0 2 inch  5 mm           1 80   0 020 inch   45 7   0 5 mm           3 63   0 020 inches   92 2   0 5 mm         Figure 2 4 Wiring Clearances    We recommend you mount the controller in a panel not  more than 0 2 in   5 mm  thick     1  Choose a panel location free from excessive heat  more  than 50   C  122   F    dust  and unauthorized ha
146. eading  HI RDG      The controller has two types of input filtering     e The rejection filter ignores sensor readings outside the  acceptance band when subsequent readings are within  the band  For temperature sensors  the band is  5    about the last accepted reading  For linear inputs the  band is  0 5  of the input range  This filter is not ad   justable     e A simulated resistor capacitor  RC  filter damps the  input response if inputs change unrealistically or  change faster than the system can respond  If the in   put filter is enabled  the process variable responds to  a step change by going to 2 3 of the actual value within  the number of scans you set     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT FILTER     3 SCANS    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0 to 255 scans  0 disables the filter        Watlow Anafaze 89    Chapter 4  Setup    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Setup Loop Control Parameters Menu    Use the SETUP LOOP CONTROL PARAMS menu to adjust  heat and cool control parameters  including     e Proportional band  PB  or gain   integral  TI or reset    and derivative  TD  or rate  settings    e Output filter  e Spread between heat and cool outputs    The controller has separate PID and filter settings for heat  and cool outputs  The screens used to set these parameters  are nearly identical  In this section  only the heat screens  are shown and explained  The heat and cool parameters ap   pear only if the corresponding output is enabled     See Setup L
147. ed  txB  TxA  F  gt    TB1L1  3151719  1315117  19  21123125    1 s908  CHICH       CHICH  c  CHICH pe   CH CH  Gna  Rx  1 2  0 4 0 5 6 7 18  7   7 CE  TB2   IN IN   m  IN IN   m  IN IN C0M IN IN  RXB RXA  214161  8 110112 14 16 18  20 22 24  26 MADE  CHICH  c  CH CH  c  CHICH  5  CH CH Gndf Tx  IN THE  1 2 o0 3 4 0 5 7 8  7 47 USA  N IIN   m  IN  IN   m JIN lIN  Ref liIN lIN  TxB TXA  TB 315  719  iti 3 15  17  1921123  25  c1S916  CHICH  c  CHICHI c  CHICH CH  CH Gnd  RX    Z o13 ols 6 lz ele  7  CAS200  TB2 IN IN   m IN  IN   m  IN IN  COM IN IN IRXB RXA   7      b   214176  8  10112  14  16 18 120 22  24  26  MADE   V1C lena  CHICH c  CHICH  c  CHICH  5yICH CH  Gnd  Tx  IN THE  o 71  19  10  o   11 12  o  13  14 15 16  7   7   USA  m IN HIN   m  IN IN   m JIN IN  ReflIN  IN  TXB TXA                                                                   Figure 2 15 CLS200 Connector Locations    Input Wiring Recommendations    30    Use multicolored stranded shielded cable for analog inputs   Watlow Anafaze recommends that you use 20 AWG wire     0 5 mm2   If the sensor manufacturer requires it  you can    also use 24 or 22 AWG wiring  0 2 mm      Most inputs use a  shielded twisted pair  some require a 3 wire input     Follow the instructions pertaining to the type s  of input s   you are installing     The controller accepts the following inputs without any  special scaling resistors     e J  K T S  R  B and E thermocouples   e Linear inputs with ranges between  10 and 60 mV  
148. ee  Chapter 7  Ramp Soak     Watlow Anafaze    69    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200 CLS200 Series User s Guide    70 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Setup       The setup menus let you change detailed configuration in   formation  This section describes how to set up the control   ler from menus in the controller firmware  The following  information is included in this chapter     e Accessing the setup menus  e Changing parameter settings  e Description of controller parameters    If you have not set up a CLS200 series controller before  or  if you do not know what values to enter  please read Chap   ter 8  Tuning and Control  which contains PID tuning con   stants and useful starting values     How to Access the Setup Menus    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Use the three key sequence to enter the setup menus     1  Select the single loop display for the loop you wish to  edit     2  Press ENTER then ALARM ACK then CHNG SP to access  the setup menus  Do not press these keys at the same  time  press them one at a time       ALARM CHNG  ACK SP    3  The first setup menu appears              To prevent unauthorized personnel from accessing setup  parameters  the controller reverts to the single loop display  if you do not press any keys for three minutes     Watlow Anafaze 71    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    How to Change a Parameter    To change a parameter  first select the appropriate menu   then the parameter     When you enter the setup menus  the first men
149. eed not reach or cross set   point to successfully determine the PID parameters  While  autotuning the controller looks at the delay between when  power is applied and when the system responds in order to  determine the proportional band  PB   The controller then  looks for the slope of the rising temperature to become con   stant in order to determine the integral term  TD  The de   rivative term  TD  is derived mathematically from the TI   When the controller has finished autotuning  the loop   s  control status switches to AUTO  If the process reaches 75   of the setpoint or the autotuning time exceeds ten minutes   the controller switches to AUTO and applies the PID con   stants it has calculated up to that point    The Watlow Anafaze autotune is started at ambient tem   perature or at a temperature above ambient  However  the  temperature must be stable and there must be sufficient  time for the controller to determine the new PID parame   ters     A loop must be stable at a temperature well  below the setpoint in order to successfully  autotune  The controller will not complete  tuning if the temperature exceeds 75  of set   point before the new parameters are found     The following procedure explains how to autotune a loop     1  Select the single loop display of the loop to be tuned     Watlow Anafaze 63    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    A    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    2  Ensure the loop   s process variable is stable and the  loop is in MAN control status     3
150. er 1  System Overview    Watlow Anafaze provides cables required to install your  CLS200  A 50 pin SCSI cable connects the TB50 to the  CLS200     The optional cable used to connect the CLS200 to a comput   er using EIA TIA 232 communications has a DB9 or DB25  connector for the computer and bare wires for connecting to  the CLS200     Watlow Anafaze has made every effort to ensure the reli   ability and safety of this product  In addition  we have pro   vided recommendations that will allow you to safely install  and maintain this controller     The CLS200 controller may fail full on  100  output pow   er  or full off  0  output power   or may remain full on if an  undetected sensor failure occurs  For more information  about failed sensor alarms  see Failed Sensor Alarms on  page 65    Design your system to be safe even if the controller sends a  0  or 100  output power signal at any time  Install inde   pendent  external safety devices that will shut down the  system if a failure occurs     Typically  a shutdown device consists of an FM approved  high low process limit controller that operates a shutdown  device such as an mechanical contactor  The limit control   ler monitors for a hazardous condition such as an under   temperature or over temperature fault  If a hazardous con   dition is detected  the limit controller sends a signal to open  the contactor     The safety shutdown device  limit controller and contactor   must be independent from the process control equipme
151. ess which uses only proportional control  settles at a point above or below the setpoint  it never  reaches the setpoint by itself  This behavior is known as off   set or droop     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    m4 Setpoint      Proportional  Band             t      process Variable             Figure 8 2 Proportional Control    Proportional and Integral Control    With proportional and integral control  the integral term  corrects for offset by repeating the proportional band   s er   ror correction until there is no error  For example  if a pro   cess tends to settle about 5   F below the setpoint   appropriate integral control brings it to the desired setting  by gradually increasing the output until there is no devia   tion        Setpoint  az ge a a ae Over     Proportional  Band             t    process Variable             Figure 8 3 Proportional and Integral Control    Proportional and integral action working together can  bring a process to setpoint and stabilize it  However  with  some processes the user may be faced with choosing be   tween parameters that make the process very slow to reach  setpoint and parameters that make the controller respond  quickly  but introduce some transient oscillations when the  setpoint or load changes  The extent to which these oscilla   tions of the process variable exceed the setpoint is called  overshoot     Proportional  Integral and Derivative Control    Deriva
152. example settings  flow sensor with 0 5 Vde  signal 191  example settings  pressure sensor with 4 20mA  signal 190  example settings  pulse encoder 192  linear inputs 86 89  process variable retransmit 114 115  pulse inputs 86 89    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Index    scaling resistors  CLS204 and CLS208 input circuit 180  CLS216 input circuit 184  for current inputs 33  181  184  for RTD inputs 32  183  for thermistor inputs 183  for voltage inputs 32  182  185  installing 180 186   SCSI cable 7 9  clearance 13 14  195  installing 27   SDAC HI VALUE  default value 93  description 95  location 233   SDAC LO VALUE  default value 93  description 95  location 233   SDAC MODE  default value 93  description 95  location 233   SEG    EV  DO   ACTIVE STATE  description 141  location 136  233   SEG    EVENT   OUTPUT  description 141  location 136  233   SEG    TR  DI   ACTIVE STATE  description 142  location 136  233   SEG    TR  DI   TRIG  description 143  location 136  233   SEG    TRIG   INPUT NR  description 142  location 136  233   SEGMENT    EDIT SEG EVENTS  description 141  location 136  233   SEGMENT    EDIT SEG TRGGRS  description 142  location 136  233   SEGMENT    LAST SEGMENT  description 144  location 136  233   SEGMENT    SEG SETPT  description 140  location 136  233   SEGMENT    SEG TIME  description 140  location 136  233   SEGMENT    SEG TOLERANCE  description 143  location 136  233   SENSOR FAIL CL OUTPUT  and output override feature 77  and reversed thermocouple detect
153. ffas the temperature rises  and  the point at which it turns back on as the temperature falls     For a loop using PID control  the spread determines how  far the process variable must be from the setpoint before  the controller can switch from heating to cooling  A loop  will not switch from heat to cool or vice versa unless the  process variable deviates from setpoint by more than the  spread     When the loop is using PID control and the spread is set to  0  the PID calculation alone determines when the heat or  cool output should be on     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SPREAD      5    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0 to 255  25 5  2 55   255  or 0255   depending upon the DISP FORMAT setting     To enable the sensor failure recovery feature  select a digi   tal input at this parameter  If the specified input is held  low when the sensor fails  the loop returns to automatic  control after a failed sensor is corrected        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 RESTORE PID    DIGIN   NONE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable range  NONE  disable the sensor failure recov   ery feature   1 to 8     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 4  Setup    Setup Loop Outputs Menu    Use the SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu to    e Enable or disable outputs   e Set output type   e Set cycle time for time proportioning outputs    e Enter Serial DAC parameters  for Serial DAC out   puts     e   Select control action  e Set output level limit and 
154. file on page 151     4  Press YES then ENTER to reset the profile  You will  see the ASSIGN PROFILE parameter  See Assigning a  Profile to a Loop on page 148     5  Choose one of the available profiles or NONE  to  unassign  and press ENTER     6  To return to the single loop display without changing  the profile assignments  press BACK     Running a Profile    When you assign a profile  it does not start running imme   diately  Instead  the loop is in the START mode and the    148 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Starting a Profile    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    READY segment  segment 0   Use the SET MODE parameter  to start a profile  put it in RUN mode      LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 A SEGO1 05 R    SET MODE  RUN    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        You can start a profile only when it is in the READY seg   ment     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop you want  to start     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key three times  The SET  MODE parameter appears     3  Press YES and ENTER to start the profile  While the  profile is in START mode  the only mode available is  the RUN mode     Running Several Profiles Simultaneously    To run several profiles simultaneously  follow these steps     1  Set up the profiles so that segment 1 of each profile  has the same latched trigger     2  Assign the profiles to the appropriate loops  The loops  will go to the READY segment of each profile     Set each profile to RUN mode   Trip the trigger     Ed
155. for more in   formation about installing scaling resistors      2  Select the display format  The smallest possible range  is   9999 to  3 0000  the largest possible range is   9 999 to 30 000     3  Enter the appropriate scaling values for your process     Configuring Dual DAC Outputs    Dual DAC modules ship with both outputs configured for  the signal type and span ordered  The module contains two  independent circuits  DAC1 and DAC2   These circuits can  be configured for different output types  Remove the board  from the housing and set the jumpers  The odd numbered  jumpers determine the signal from DAC1  the even num   bered jumpers determine the output from DAC2     186 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring       Figure 9 8 Dual DAC    Table 9 16 Dual DAC Jumper Settings       Jumper Settings             Output  Type  1 2   3 4   5 6 7 8   9 10   11 12   13 14  0 to 5V   dc  B A A O B A O  0 to 10V   dc  B A A O B O O  4 to 20 mA O A B A A O A                            two pins        A   Load jumper in the    A    position  or load jumper if header has only    B   Load jumper in the    B    position   O   Open  Do not load jumper           1     Power down the system  if the Dual DAC is already in   stalled and wired      Ensure the DAC1 and DAC2 terminal blocks or asso   ciated wires are labeled such that you will know which  terminal block connects to which side of the board if  the modul
156. g devices 39  extruder control 107 110  extruder control algorithm 110  extruder firmware option code 81    F    failed sensor alarms  restoring automatic control after sensor repair 66  RTD open 66  RTD shorted 66  setting up 65 66  thermocouple open 65  thermocouple short 66    224 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    filter  output 91  158  sensor input 89  firmware  custom 82  version 81  frequency 81  front panel 8  navigation 51  overview 52  FS alarm code 166  functions activated by digital inputs 39    G    gain  see proportional band  ground loops 24  communications 47  isolation 35  paths 24  and personal computers 24  and thermocouples 31  troubleshooting 172  175  grounding  troubleshooting 172    H    H W AMBIENT FAILURE 166  169  H W GAIN FAILURE 166  170  H W OFFSET FAILURE 166  170  HD alarm code 164  HEAT 56  HEAT CONTROL FILTER  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  HEAT CONTROL OUTPUT  default value 93  description 94  location 73  233  HEAT CONTROL PB  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  HEAT CONTROL TD  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  HEAT CONTROL TI  default value 90  description 91  location 73  233  HEAT OUTPUT  curves 98  default value 93  description 98  location 73  233  HEAT OUTPUT ACTION  default value 93  description 96  location 73  233  HEAT OUTPUT CYCLE TIME  default value 93  description 95  location 73  233    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    HEAT OUTPUT LIMI
157. ged  See also Direct Action   Reverse Action     Address  A numerical identifier for a controller when  used in computer communications     Alarm  A signal that indicates that the process has  exceeded or fallen below a certain range  around the setpoint  For example  an alarm  may indicate that a process is too hot or too  cold  See also    Deviation Alarm   Failed Sensor Alarm   Global Alarm   High Deviation Alarm   High Process Alarm   Loop Alarm   Low Deviation Alarm   Low Process Alarm    Alarm Delay  The lag time before an alarm is activated     Alternating Current  AC    An electric current that reverses at regular  intervals  and alternates positive and negative  values     Ambient Temperature    The temperature of the air or other medium  that surrounds the components of a thermal    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Glossary    system     American Wire Gauge  AWG    A standard of the dimensional characteristics  of wire used to conduct electrical current or  signals  AWG is identical to the Brown and  Sharpe  B amp S  wire gauge     Ammeter  An instrument that measures the magnitude  of an electric current     Ampere  Amp    A unit that defines the rate of flow of electric   ity  current  in the circuit  Units are one cou   lomb  6 25 x 1018 electrons  per second     Analog Output   A continuously variable signal that is used to  represent a value  such as the process value or  setpoint value  Typical hardware configurations  are 0 to 20mA  4 to 20mA or 0 to 5 V   de      Aut
158. has the desired relationship to the process  variable of the primary loop  In this application  the pro   portional band  PB  of the primary loop is set to 10   F and  the integral and derivative are turned off     190  F                 170  F  150  F 4       0  50  100  Heat Output      150  F 145  F 140  F Process Variable 1         eng  units    SP1   SP1 PB1     Primary Loop Output    Figure 6 6 Secondary Loop Setpoint Related  to Primary Loop Output    As the temperature of loop 1 drops  the output of loop 1 goes  up proportionally and the setpoint of loop 2 goes up propor   tionally  Thus heat is added to the system at the element    Watlow Anafaze 123    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Ratio Control    124    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    even though the temperature near the element may have  been at setpoint  150   F      With proportional control  when loop 1 is at setpoint  its  output is 0   and the setpoint of loop 2 is equal to the base  setpoint  150   F   If the temperature of loop 1 drops to 149    F  the deviation results in a proportional output of 10    This times the span of 40   F results in an increase in set   point for loop 2 of 4   F  The loop 2 setpoint increases to 154    F  For every degree that loop 1 drops  loop 2 increases by 4    F until the output of loop 1 is 100  and the loop 2 setpoint  is 190   F  Any further drop in the loop 1 process variable  does not affect loop 2     The PID parameters of loop 2 must be tuned to perform ef   ficien
159. he controller     Go to the DIGITAL INPUTS parameter in the MANUAL  I 0 TEST menu  This parameter shows whether the  digital inputs are H  high  or open  or L  low  or closed      Attach a wire to the terminal of the digital input to  test  When the wire is connected only to the digital in   put terminal  the DIGITAL INPUTS parameter should  show that the input is H  high   When you connect the  other end of the wire to controller common  TB50 ter   minal 3   the DIGITAL INPUTS parameter should  show that the input is L  low      Additional Troubleshooting for Computer    Supervised Systems    Computer Problems    174    These four elements must work properly in a computer su   pervised system     The controller    The computer and its EIA TIA 232 or EIA TIA 485 se   rial interface    The EJA TIA 232 or EIA TIA 485 communication lines  The computer software    For troubleshooting  disconnect the communications line  from the computer and follow the troubleshooting steps in  the first section of this chapter  The next few sections ex   plain troubleshooting for the other elements of computer  supervised systems     If you are having computer or serial interface problems   check the following     Check your software manual and make sure your com   puter meets the software and system requirements     Check the communications interface  cables  and con   nections  Make sure the serial interface is set accord   ing to the manufacturer   s instructions     To test an EIA TIA 232 in
160. he following sections list symptoms in each of these cate   gories and suggest possible causes and corrective actions     Process and Deviation Alarms    When a process or deviation alarm occurs  the controller  switches to the single loop display for the loop with the  alarm and displays the alarm code on the screen  Software  such as AnaWin or WatView displays a message on the  alarm screen and logs the alarm in the event log     Table 9 1 Controller Alarm Codes for  Process and Deviation Alarms                                  Code Alarm Description   HP High Process Process variable has risen above the high process alarm setpoint    HD High Deviation Process variable has risen above the setpoint by more than the devia   tion alarm value    LD Low Deviation Process variable has dropped below the setpoint by more than the  deviation alarm value    LP Low Process Process variable has dropped below the low process alarm setpoint    164 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Responding to Process and Deviation Alarms  In a heating application  a low process or low deviation  alarm may indicate one of the following   e The heater has not had time to raise the temperature     e The load has increased and the temperature has fall   en     e The control status is set to manual instead of automatic   e The heaters are not working due to a hardware failure     e The sensor is not placed correctly and is not me
161. he same as DZC except  that the minimum switching time is three ac line cycles   This may be advantageous in some applications using  three phase heaters and three phase power switching     Analog Outputs    For analog outputs  the PID algorithm calculates an output  between 0 and 100   This percentage of the analog output  range can be applied to an output device via a Dual DAC or  a Serial DAC     Output Filter    The output filter digitally smooths PID control output sig   nals  It has a range of 0 to 255 scans  which gives a time  constant of 0 to 170 seconds for a CLS216  0 to 85 seconds  for a CLS208 or 0 to 43 seconds for a CLS204  Use the out   put filter if you need to filter out erratic output swings due  to extremely sensitive input signals  like a turbine flow sig   nal or an open air thermocouple in a dry air gas oven     The output filter can also enhance PID control  Some pro   cesses are very sensitive and would otherwise require a  large proportional band  making normal control methods  ineffective  Using the output filter allows a smaller propor   tional band to be used  achieving better control     Also  use the filter to reduce the process output swings and  output noise when a large derivative is necessary  or to  make badly tuned PID loops and poorly designed processes  behave properly     158 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Reverse and Direct Action    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    With reverse action an increas
162. i   cations       Parameter    Description       Absolute Maximum Common  Mode Voltage    Measured between output terminals and controller common   1 000V       Resolution    15 bits  plus polarity bit for voltage outputs    0 305mV for 10V output range    0 00061 mA for 20 mA output range        Accuracy  Calibrated for Voltage  Output     For voltage output    0 005V  0 05  at full scale   For current output    0 1 mA  0 5  at full scale        Temperature coefficien    440 ppm    C typical       Isolation Breakdown Voltage    1 000V between input power and signals       Current    0 to 20 mA  500 Q load max         Voltage    0 to 10V   dc  with 10 mA source capability       Output Response Time    1 ms typical          Update Rate       Once per controller A D cycle nominal  Twice per second max   imum for 60 Hz clock rate     Output changes are step changes due to the fast time con   stant  All Serial DAC loop outputs are updated at the same  time           Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze 211    Chapter 11  Specifications CLS200 Series User s Guide    212 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Glossary    A    AC  See Alternating Current     AC Line Frequency  The frequency of the AC power line measured  in Hertz  Hz   usually 50 or 60 Hz     Accuracy   Closeness between the value indicated by a  measuring instrument and a physical constant  or known standards     Action   The response of an output when the process  variable is chan
163. iability for any products or parts that have been sub   ject to misuse  accident  negligence  failure of electric power or modification by the  Customer without the written approval of Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated  Final deter   mination of warranty eligibility shall be made by Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated  If a  warranty claim is considered invalid for any reason  the Customer will be charged for  services performed and expenses incurred by Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated in han   dling and shipping the returned unit     If replacement parts are supplied or repairs made during the original warranty  period  the warranty period for the replacement or repaired part shall terminate with  the termination of the warranty period of the original product or part     The foregoing warranty constitutes the sole liability of Watlow Anafaze  Incorporated  and the Customer s sole remedy with respect to the products  It is in lieu of all other  warranties  liabilities  and remedies  Except as thus provided  Watlow Anafaze  Inc   disclaims all warranties  express or implied  including any warranty of merchantabil   ity or fitness for a particular purpose     Please Note  External safety devices must be used with this equipment     Table of Contents    List of Figures xi  List of Tables xv    1 System Overview 1    Manual Contents 1  Getting Started 2   Safety Symbols 2   Initial Inspection 2  Product Features 3  CLS200 Parts List 5  Technical Description 7   CLS200 7   TB50 8   CLS200 Cabling
164. ide                                                                                                             Table 2 7 1TB50 Connections for CLS216  Terminal   Function a i Terminal Function Ea ciate   1  5V   dc  2  5V   dc    3 CTRL COM 4 CTRL COM   5 Not Used 6 Watchdog Timer   7 Pulse Input 8 Global Alarm   9 Output 1 Loop 1 heat 10 Output 342 Pulse loop cool   11 Output 2 Loop 2 heat 12 Output 33 Loop 16 cool   13 Output 3 Loop 3 heat 14 Output 32 Loop 15 cool   15 Output 4 Loop 4 heat 16 Output 31 Loop 14 cool   17 Output 5 Loop 5 heat 18 Output 30 Loop 13 cool   19 Output 6 Loop 6 heat 20 Output 29 Loop 12 cool   21 Output 7 Loop 7 heat 22 Output 28 Loop 11 cool   23 Output 8 Loop 8 heat 24 Output 27 Loop 10 cool   25 Output 9 Loop 9 heat 26 Output 26 Loop 9 cool   27 Output 10 Loop 10 heat 28 Output 25 Loop 8 cool   29 Output 11 Loop 11 heat 30 Output 24 Loop 7 cool   31 Output 12 Loop 12 heat 32 Output 23 Loop 6 cool   33 Output 13 Loop 13 heat 34 Output 22 Loop 5 cool   35 Output 14 Loop 14 heat 36 Output 21 Loop 4 cool   37 Output 15 Loop 15 heat 38 Output 20 Loop 3 cool   39 Output 16 Loop 16 heat 40 Output 19 Loop 2 cool   41 Output 17 Pulse loop heat 42 Output 18 Loop 1 cool   43 Input 1 44 Input 2   45 Input 3 46 Input 4   47 Input 5 48 Input 6   49 Input 7 50 Input 8  1 The indicated outputs are dedicated for control when enabled in  the loop setup  If one or both of a loop   s outputs are disabled  the  corresponding digital outputs become available for al
165. ied value  A low process alarm occurs if  the process variable drops below a separate user specified  value  See Figure 3 9     Enter the alarm high and low process setpoints at the HI  PROC ALARM SETPT and LO PROC ALARM SETPT param   eters in the SETUP LOOP ALARMS menu     Watlow Anafaze 67    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200 CLS200 Series User s Guide    High process alarm on High process alarm off    High process alarm set point        Deadband    High deviation  alarm off       Setpoint   Deviation alarm value  Deadband    Setpoint  Low deviation  alarm off RN    enn Al  Deadband         Setpoint   Deviation alarm value  Low deviation A    Sey e e eee alarmon______  mere   Deadband         Low process alarm setpoint       Low process alarm on Low process alarm off    Figure 3 9 Activation and Deactivation of  Process Alarms    Deviation Alarms   A deviation alarm occurs if the process deviates from set    point by more than a user specified amount   See Figure   3 9   Set the deviation with the DEV ALARM VALUE param    eter in the SETUP LOOP ALARMS menu    Upon power up or when the setpoint changes  the behavior   of the deviation alarms depends upon the alarm function    e   If the alarm type parameter is set to ALARM  then de   viation alarms do not activate until the after the pro   cess variable has first come within the deviation alarm  band  This prevents nuisance alarms    e Ifthe alarm type parameter is set to CONTROL  then  the deviation output switches on whenever th
166. ing    Failed Sensor Alarms    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    When a failed sensor alarm occurs  the controller switches  to the single loop display for the loop with the alarm and  displays an alarm code on the screen  AnaWin or WatView  displays a message on the alarm screen and logs the alarm  in the event log                                Table 93 Failed Sensor Alarm Codes  Code Alarm Description   FS Failed Sensor Open thermocouple    Reversed   ee  RT Thermocouple Temperature changed in the opposite direction than expected   ST ilar Temperature failed to change as expected    Thermocouple  RO RTD Open Positive or negative lead is broken or disconnected   RS RTD Shorted Positive and negative leads are shorted           System Alarms    A failed sensor alarm clears once it has been acknowledged  and the sensor is repaired     If the controller detects a hardware problem  it displays a  message  The message persists until the condition is cor           rected   Table 9 4 Hardware Error Messages  Message Possible Cause Recommended Action  LOW POWER Power supply failed  See Low Power on page 168        BATTERY DEAD    RAM battery is dead     See Battery Dead on page 168        AW    Ambient warning  Ambient tem   perature exceeds operating lim   its by less than 5   C  9   F      See Ambient Warning on page  168        H W AMBIENT FATLURE    H W GAIN FAILURE    Ambient temperature exceeds  operating limits by 5   C  9   F      Reference voltage  5V   dc    shorted to commo
167. inou ype    H   Z    Reading Input Reading Reading pur yp    Figure 4 2 Two Points Determine Process  Variable Conversion    Before you enter the values determining the two points for  the conversion line  you must choose an appropriate dis   play format  The controller has six characters available for  process display  select the setting with the desired number  of decimal places  Use a display format that matches the  range of the process variable and resolution of the sensor   The display format you choose is used for the process vari   able setpoint  alarms limits  deadband  spread and propor   tional band     The process variable range for the scaled input is between  the process variable values that correspond to the 0  and  100  input readings  For the pulse input  it is between the  0 Hz and 2000 Hz readings  The process variable range de   fines the limits for the setpoint and alarms  See Figure 4 3     86 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 4  Setup    20 i ee R  High Proces     Variabale    Process Variable    Range          Low Process    Variabale    0 PSI       ty   Linear input type    0     omy Low   High  OHz Reading Input Reading Reading 2000 Hz  Pulse input type    Figure 4 3 Process Variable Limited by Input  Reading Range    Display Format    Select a display format for a linear or pulse input  Choose  a format appropriate for the input range and sensor accu   racy     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 DISP FORMAT       999 TO
168. ion 85  and thermocouple short detection 79  description 97  location 73  233  values 97   Sensor Fail Cool Output parameter  and failed sensor alarm 65          Watlow Anafaze 229    Index    Sensor Fail Heat Output parameter  and failed sensor alarm 65  SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT  and output override feature 77  and reversed thermocouple detection 85  and thermocouple short detection 79  default value 93  description 97  location 73  233  values 97  sensor inputs  engineering units 84  failed sensor alarms 166  filter 89  offset 84  ranges 83  specifications 200  troubleshooting 171  type  setting 83  wiring 29 34  Serial DAC  agency compliance 210  clock input 210  configuring outputs 188  configuring the controller output 94  dimensions 20  209  environment 209  input specifications 210  jumper positions 188  mounting 19 20  output specifications 211  process variable retransmit 113  118  specifications 209 211  wiring 44 45  SET COOL OUTPUT 62  SET HEAT OUTPUT 62  SET MODE 147 148  SETPOINT 61  setpoint  changing 61  ramp soak ready setpoint 138  using cascade control to set 118  using PLC to set  example 129  using ratio control to set 124  SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS 74  location 73  233  parameters in menu 74  SETUP LOOP ALARMS 99  location 73  233  parameters in menu 99  SETUP LOOP CASCADE 119  location 112  233  SETUP LOOP CONTROL PARAMS 90  location 73  233  parameters in menu 90  SETUP LOOP INPUT 82  location 73  233  parameters in menu 82  SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS 93  location 
169. is a thermocouple or RTD  specify the off   set to correct for signal inaccuracy at a given point  For ex   ample  at temperatures below 400   F  a type J  thermocouple may be inaccurate or    offset    by several de   grees  Use an independent thermocouple or your own cali   bration equipment to find the offset for your equipment     A positive value increases the reading and a negative value  decreases it     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 INPUT READING       OFFSET   O0 F    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  See Table 4 8     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Reversed T C Detection    Input Pulse Sample Time    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Table 4 8 Input Reading Offset                         Offset Range  Type of Sensor  oF   C  RTD2  7  300 to  300  300 to  300  T  RTD1  300 0 to  300 0    300 0 to  300 0  3  300 to  76  300 to  300  R  300 to  66  300 to  300       Set this parameter to ON to enable polarity checking for  thermocouples  If a reversed thermocouple is detected  the  controller sets the loop to manual control at the SENSOR  FAIL HT OUTPUT or SENSOR FAIL CL OUTPUT power level  and displays the alarm        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  01 REVERSED T C  DETECT   OFF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  ON or OFF              You can connect a digital pulse signal of up to 2 kHz to the  pulse input  Use this parameter to set the time over which  pulses are counted  The controller coun
170. is section describes how to properly connect thermocou   ples  RTDs  current and voltage inputs to your controller   The controller can accept any mix of available input types   Some input types require that special scaling resistors be  installed  generally done by Watlow Anafaze before the  controller is delivered     Allinputs are installed at the CH input connectors  TB1  at  the back of the controller  The illustrations below show the  connector locations for all the CLS200 series controllers     A    CAUTION  Never run input leads in bundles with high  power wires or near other sources of EMI   This could inductively couple voltage onto  the input leads and damage the controller  or  could induce noise and cause poor measure   ment and control     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 29    Chapter 2  Installation    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        TB1 1 13151719  1113  15  17  19  21123  25  CH CH  C  CHICH  C  Re  Re  Reg  Re   Re  Gnd  RX CLS204  1 2  o0o  3  4  0o  ser ser ser ser        CE  TB2   IN  IN   m JIN  IN   m  ved ved Comlved vedirxB RxA        4   214176  8  10 12 14 16 18  20  22 24   26 Ae  C CHICH  C ICHICH   C IRe R Re   Re  Gnd  TX     a ate 1 2 o0 3 4 0 ser leer OV ser leer     USA  m IN  IN   m  IN  IN   m  ved ved Ref  vedjv
171. iting a Profile While It ls Running    Doc   0600 3050 2000    You can edit a profile while it is running  Changes made to  segments after the current segment will take effect when  the segment is reached  Changes made to the segments  that have already been completed will take effect the next  time the profile is run  Do not edit the current segment   Changes to the current segment can have unexpected con   sequences     Watlow Anafaze 149    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak CLS200 Series User s Guide    Holding a Profile or Continuing from Hold    Use the SET MODE parameter to select the ramp soak pro   file mode  Table 7 6 shows the available modes     Table 7 6 Ramp Soak Profile Modes                         Current Available ati  Mode Mode Description  START RUN Begin running the assigned profil    Continue from user selected hold  The pro   file uns from the point when you put the pro   file in HOLD mode   You cannot continue from  HOLD CONT a tolerance hold or a trigger wait    After you choose this mode  the controller  switches back to RUN mode   RUN HOLD Hold the profil         Holding a Profile    In HOLD mode  all loop parameters stay at their current set   tings until you change the mode or reset the profile  To put  a profile into HOLD mode  follow these steps     1  In the single loop display  switch to the loop you want  to hold     2  Press the RAMP SOAK key three times to see the SET  MODE parameter        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 A SEGO1 05 R  SET MODE  HOLD    ALARM _
172. l  may  break easily  or may cause intermittent connections    e Use shielded wire  The electrical shield protects the  signals and the CLS200 from electrical noise  Connect  one end of the input and output wiring shield to earth  ground    e Use copper wire for all connections other than thermo   couple sensor inputs     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 21    Chapter 2  Installation    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                        Table 2 1 Cable Recommendations  A No  of 2 Maximum  Function Mfr  P N Wires AWG mm Length  Anaoa ioii Belden 9154 2 20 0 5  MAA Belden 8451 2 22 0 5  Belden 8772 3 20 0 5  pau Belden 9770 3 22 0 5  Thermocouple Inputs T C Ext  Wire 2 20 0 5  Belden 9539 9 24 0 2  cule ia on Belden 9542 20 24 0 2  g Ribbon Cable 50 22 t014   0 5 to 2 5  Belden 9154 2 20 0 5  Pnaleg Upu Belden 8451 2 22 0 5  Belden 9729 4 24 0 2 4 000 ft   1 219 m   Computer Communica    Belden 9730 6 24 0 2  tion  EIA TIA 232  422   Belden 9842 4 24 0 2 4 000 ft   1 219 m   or 485  or 20 mA Belden 9843 6 24 0 2  Belden 9184 4 22 0 5 6 000 ft   1 829 m        Noise Suppression    Symptoms of RFI EMI    22    The CLS200   s outputs are typically used to drive solid state  relays  These relays may in turn operate more inductive  types of loads such as electromechanical relays  alarm    horns and motor starters  Such devices may generate elec   tromagnetic interference  EMI or noise   If the controller is  placed close to sources of EMI  it may not function cor
173. l switches between  heating and cooling     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Control Outputs    Output Control Signals    On Off    Time Proportioning  TP     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    The controller provides open collector outputs for control   These outputs normally control the process using solid  state relays     Open collector outputs can be configured to drive a serial  digital to analog converter  Serial DAC  which  in turn   can provide 0 to 5 V   dc   0 to 10 V   dc  or 4 to 20 mA  control signals to operate field output devices     The following sections explain the different control output  signals available     When on off control is used  the output is on or off depend   ing on the difference between the setpoint and the process  variable  PID algorithms are not used with on off control   The output variable is always off or on  0  or 100       With time proportioning outputs  the PID algorithm calcu   lates an output between 0 and 100   which is represented  by turning on an output for that percent of a fixed  user se   lected time base or cycle time     The cycle time is the time over which the output is propor   tioned  and it can be any value from 1 to 255 seconds  For   example  if the output is 30  and the cycle time is 10 sec    onds  then the output will be on for 3 seconds and off for 7  seconds  Figure 8 5 shows examples of time proportioning   and distributed zero crossing  DZC  wavef
174. lay closed while the controller is running  so  you are notified if the microprocessor shuts down     Front Panel or Computer Operation  Set up and  run the controller from the front panel or from a local  or remote computer  Watlow Anafaze offers WatView   a Windows   compatible Human Machine Interface   HMI  software package that includes data logging  and graphing features in addition to process monitor   ing and parameter setup screens     Modbus RTU Protocol  EIA TIA 232 and 485  Communications  Connect to PLCs  operator inter   face terminals and third party software packages us   ing the widely supported Modbus RTU protocol     Multiple Job Storage  Store up to eight jobs in mem   ory  and access them locally by entering a single job  number or remotely via digital inputs  Each job is a set  of operating conditions  including setpoints and  alarms     Nonlinear Output Curves  Select either of two non   linear output curves for each control output     Autotuning  Use the autotune feature to set up your  system quickly and easily  The CLS200 internal ex   pert system table finds the correct PID parameters for  your process    Pulse Counter Input  Use the pulse counter input  for precise control of motor or belt speed     Low Power Shutdown  The controller shuts down  and turns off all outputs when it detects the input volt   age drop below the minimum safe operating level     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 1  System Overview    
175. limit time  e Select sensor fail output  output override     e   Select a nonlinear output curve    LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 01    OUTPUTS      ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Table 4 11 shows the parameters available in the SETUP  LOOP OUTPUTS menu  Both heat and cool outputs have the  same parameters  only one of each parameter is shown     Table 4 11 Setup Loop Outputs    Doc   0600 3050 2000                                                       Parameter Default Value  HEAT CONTROL OUTPUT  ENABLED  HEAT OUTPUT TYPE  TP  HEAT OUTPUT CYCLE TIME  10S  SDAC MODE   VOLTAGE  SDAC LO VALUE   0 00 VDC  SDAC HI VALUE   10 00 VDC  HEAT OUTPUT ACTION  REVERSE  HEAT OUTPUT LIMIT  100   HEAT OUTPUT LIMIT TIME  CONT  SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT  0   HEAT T C BRK OUT AVG  OFF  HEAT OUTPUT  LINEAR  COOL CONTROL OUTPUT  DISABLED         The SDAC parameters are available only if you select SDAC as  the output type  Use these parameters to configure the Serial  DAC signal output     Watlow Anafaze 93    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    Enable or Disable Heat or Cool Outputs    Enable or disable the heat or cool output for the loop  If you  want the loop to have a control output  you must enable at  least one output  You can also disable a heat or cool control  output and use the output for something else  such as an  alarm        LOOP PROCESS UNITS  01 HEAT CONTROL  OUTPUT   ENABLED    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  ENABLED or DISABLED              Heat or
176. low Anafaze Serial DAC     Consult Chapter 4  Setup for information on setting up the  other options of the controller     Cascade control is used to control thermal systems with  long lag times  which cannot be as accurately controlled  with a single control loop  The output of the first  primary   loop is used to adjust the setpoint of the second  secondary   loop  The secondary loop normally executes the actual con   trol     The cascade control feature allows the output percentage of  one control loop to determine the setpoint of a second con   trol loop  By adjusting the setpoint  SP  parameters  the  user can adjust the influence that the primary loop has on  the setpoint of the secondary loop  See Figure 6 4     Some applications  such as aluminum casting  use two   zone cascade control where the primary output is used for  the primary heat control and the cascaded output is used  for boost heat  The CLS200 allows you to use the primary  heat output for both control and for determining the set   point of the secondary loop     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 6  Enhanced Features       Maximum SP    Base SP       Minimum SP    Secondary Loop   s Setpoint          100  Cool 0  Heat 100   Primary Loop   s Output           Calculation of new secondary loop setpoint   SP2   Base SP    Cool Output Power    Cool Span    Heat Output Power    Heat Span    Figure 6 4 Relationship Between the Primary  Loop   s Output and the Secondary  Lo
177. ly if you selected an output that is  not in use for control at the TEST DIGITAL OUTPUT screen     Use this parameter to manually toggle a digital output on  or off to test it  Toggling an output ON sinks current from  the output to the controller common  Toggling the output  OFF stops current flow  All tested outputs are set to OFF  when you exit the MANUAL I 0 TEST menu     You cannot toggle outputs enabled for control  To test a  control loop output  first disable it using the SETUP LOOP  OUTPUTS menu     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    DIGITAL OUTPUT    NUMBER XX   OFF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  ON or OFF        Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Keypad Test    Display Test    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Test the keypad  The test begins automatically when the  screen appears        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    KEYPAD TEST       QUIT    NO   NO     ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        e Press any key to test the keypad  The controller will  display the name of the key you have pressed     e Press NO twice to end the test and return to the top of  the MANUAL I 0 TEST menu     Use this function to test the display     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    DISPLAY TEST        ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Press YES to enter the test and display the instruction  screen     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    TO TEST DISPLAY          Y TOGGLE N QUIT       ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Press YES to begin the display of a discernable pixel pat   te
178. maximum  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  CTRL RATIO  0 5    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Enter the control ratio  which is the multiple applied to the master   The H20 fl w rate is multiplied by 0 5 to obtain the KOH fl w rate    setpoint  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 RATIO CONTROL  SP DIFF   0    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Enter the setpoint differential  or offset   For this example we have  no offset requirement and will use 0  Press ENTER           128    4  Press BACK several times until the normal loop display  appears  The setpoint of loop 2 will now be equal to one  half of the process variable of loop 2     5  To complete the ratio setup  configure both loops 1 and  2 for inputs  outputs  and alarms  See Chapter 4  Setup  for information on loop setup     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Remote Analog Setpoint    The remote analog setpoint is set up identically to ratio  control  To provide a setpoint remotely  typically a voltage  or current source is connected to an analog input on the  controller  This input is configured as a linear input type  and the master loop for ratio control  All other input types  are also usable as remote analog setpoint inputs     Specify the loop to which the analog input is connected as  the master loop and setup the rest of the ratio control pa   rameters as outlined in Setup Loop Ratio Control Menu on  page
179. mbols 55  58  when running ramp soak profile 146   battery 7   BATTERY DEAD 166   baud rate 80   BCC  see block check character   block check character 80   boost output 67   bridge circuit 32    Cc    cables  communications 9  47  SCSI 7 9  tie wrapping 35  troubleshooting 175  CALCULATING CHECKSUM 28  CANNOT LOAD JOB 75  CANNOT SAVE JOB 75  CASCADE BASE SP  description 120  location 112  233  CASCADE CL SPAN  description 121  location 112  233  cascade control 118 124  application example 121  relationship of secondary setpoint to primary  output 123  setting up  example 122  setup parameters 119 121  testing setup  example 123  CASCADE HT SPAN  description 121  location 112  233  CASCADE MAX SP  description 120  location 112  233    Watlow Anafaze 221    Index    CASCADE MIN SP  description 120  location 112  233  CASCADE PRIM  LOOP  description 119  location 112  233  case  removing 177  CE  see agency compliance  CHNG SP key  changing the setpoint 61  description 54  does not work 170  locking and unlocking 78  clearance  see installation  communications  baud rate 80  cable 9  47  controller address 79  error checking algorithm 80  ground loops 24  175  installation 45 49  jumper configurations 179  protocol 80  software problems 176  specifications 204  troubleshooting 174 176  wire sizes and lengths 22  see also EIA TIA  COMMUNICATIONS BAUD RATE  default value 74  description 80  location 73  233  COMMUNICATIONS ERR CHECK  default value 74  description 80  location 73
180. n     Hardware failed due to exces   sive voltage on inputs     Hardware failed due to exces   sive voltage on inputs     See H W Ambient Failure on  page 169     See H W Gain or Offset Failure  on page 170        H W OFFSET FAILURE          Hardware failed due to exces   sive voltage on inputs        See H W Gain or Offset Failure  on page 170           166    Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Other Behaviors    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    The following table indicates potential problems with the  system or controller and recommends corrective actions     Table 9 5    Other Symptoms       Symptom    Possible Causes    Recommended Action       Indicated tempera   ture not as expected    Controller not communicating    Sensor wiring incorrect  Noise    See Checking Analog Inputs on page 171        CLS 200 display is  not lit    Power connection incorrect    Check wiring and service  See Wiring the  Power Supply on page 25        No EPROM or bad EPROM    Replace the EPROM  See Replacing the  EPROM on page 176        CLS200 damaged or failed    Return the CLS200 for repair  See Return   ing Your Unit on page 164        CLS200 display is lit   but keys do not work    Keypad is locked    See Keys Do Not Respond on page 170        CLS200 damaged or failed    Return the CLS200 for repair  See Return   ing Your Unit on page 164        Control status of one  or more loops  changes from auto   matic to manual    Failed sensor  
181. n accept a pulse input of up to 2000 Hz from  a device such as an encoder  The frequency of this input is  scaled with user set parameters  See Setup Loop Input  Menu on page 82 and Chapter 9  Linear Scaling Examples   This scaled value is the process variable for loop 5 on a  CLS204  loop 9 on a CLS208  or loop 17 on a CLS216     The CLS200 can accommodate encoder signals up to 24V      dc  using a voltage divider or can power encoders with the  5V   dc  from the TB50 or TB18  The following figures il   lustrate connecting encoders  A pull up resistor in the  CLS200 allows open collector inputs to be used     If the signal on the pulse input exceeds  10kHz the controller   s operation may be dis   rupted  Do not connect the pulse input to a  signal source that may exceed 10kHz     CLS200 and TB50 or TB18       Pulse Input Encoder       Com                      Figure 2 20 Encoder with 5V   dc  TTL Signal    CLS200 and TB50 or TB18              5V   dc   10 kag R1  f Pulse Input Encoder  R2  e Com                         Figure 2 21 Encoder Input with Voltage Divider    For encoders with signals greater than 5V   dc   use a volt   age divider to drop the voltage to 5 volts at the input  Use  appropriate values for R  and R   depending on the encoder  excitation voltage  Be sure not to exceed the specific cur   rent load on the encoder     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    Wiring Control and Digital I O    This section
182. n the SETUP  GLOBAL PARAMETERS menu is set to MEMORY  then after a  power failure the profile will resume operation at the  elapsed time of the segment that was active when the pow   er failure occurred     152 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Tuning and Control       Control Algorithms    NOTE     Doc   0600 3050 2000    This chapter describes the different methods of control  available with the CLS200  This chapter covers control al   gorithms  control methods  PID control  starting PID val   ues and tuning instructions to help appropriately set  control parameters in the CLS200 system  For more infor   mation on PID control  consult the Watlow Anafaze Practi   cal Guide to PID     This section explains the algorithms available for control   ling a loop     The control algorithm dictates how the controller responds  to an input signal  Do not confuse control algorithms with  control output signals  for example  analog or pulsed de  voltage   There are several control algorithms available     e On off   e Proportional  P    e Proportional and integral  PI    e Proportional with derivative  PD    e Proportional with integral and derivative  PID     P  PI or PID control is necessary when process variable cy   cling is unacceptable or if the load or setpoint varies     For any of these control statuses to function     the loop must be in automatic mode     Watlow Anafaze 153    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    On Off Control    Proportional Control    154    Process  V
183. ndling    Make sure there is adequate clearance for the mount   ing hardware  terminal blocks  and cables  The con   troller extends 7 40 in   178 mm  behind the panel   Allow for an additional 0 60 to 1 60 in   15 to 41 mm   beyond the connectors      2  Temporarily cover any slots in the metal housing so  that dirt  metal filings  and pieces of wire do not enter  the housing and lodge in the electronics     3  Cuta hole in the panel 1 80 in   46 mm  by 3 63 in   92  mm  as shown below   This picture is NOT a template   it is for illustration only   Use caution  the dimensions  given here have 0 02 in   1 mm  tolerances     4  Remove the brackets and collar from the processor  module  if they are already in place     Slide the processor module into the panel cutout     Slide the mounting collar over the back of the proces   sor module  making sure the mounting screw indenta   tions face toward the back of the processor module     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 15    Chapter 2  Installation CLS200 Series User s Guide    Bracket  top and bottom                                                                                           lt     Panel      _        m  a    m LF         O H     g  o  D   OF       Oa   LF              H  i   n A o  z  a      i     H o   Bezel      Mounting Collar    Figure 2 5 Mounting Bracket    7  Loosen the mounting bracket screws enough to allow  for the mounting collar and panel thickness  Place  each mounting bracket into the mounting slots
184. nections 33   Figure 2 19   Linear Current Signal Connections 33   Figure 2 20   Encoder with 5V   dc  TTL Signal 34   Figure 2 21   Encoder Input with Voltage Divider 34   Figure 2 22   Digital Output Wiring 36   Figure 2 23   Sample Heat  Cool and Alarm Output Connections 37  Figure 2 24   Output Connections Using External Power Supply 38  Figure 2 25   TB50 Watchdog Timer Output 38   Figure 2 26   TB18 Watchdog Timer Output 38   Figure 2 27   Wiring Digital Inputs 39   Figure 2 28   Dual DAC with Current Output 43   Figure 2 29   Dual DAC with Voltage Output 44    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze ix    List of Figures CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Figure 2 30   Single Multiple Serial DACs 45   Figure 2 31   Connecting One CLS200 to a Computer Using EIA TIA 232 46  Figure 2 32   EIA TIA 485 Wiring 47   Figure 2 33   Recommended System Connections 48    3 Using the CLS200    Figure 3 1   Operator Displays 51   Figure 3 2   CLS200 Front Panel 52   Figure 3 3   Bar Graph Display 55   Figure 3 4   Single Loop Display 57   Figure 3 5   Single Loop Display  Heat and Cool Outputs Enabled 57  Figure 3 6   Single Loop Display with a Process Alarm 58   Figure 3 7   Failed Sensor Alarm in the Single Loop Display 58  Figure 3 8   Alarm Symbols in the Bar Graph Display 58   Figure 3 9   Activation and Deactivation of Process Alarms 68    4 Setup    Figure 4 1   CLS200 Menu Tree 73   Figure 4 2   Two Points Determine Process Variable Conversion 86  Figure 4 3   Process Variable Limi
185. ner and outer thermocouple  The  outer thermocouple is located in the center of the water   The inner thermocouple is located near the heating ele   ment  The desired temperature of the water is 150   F   which is measured at the outer thermocouple  Using cas   cade control  the outer thermocouple is used on the primary  loop  in this example  loop 1   and the inner thermocouple  is used on the secondary loop  loop 2   The heater is con   trolled by loop 2 with a setpoint range of 150 to 190   F        Loop 1  Primary Cascade Loop  Loop 2  Secondary Cascade Loop                            Water  150   Loop 1 Input  Process Variable  Outer Loop 2 PID Output  Thermocouple Loop 2 Input  Process Variable CLS200  Heater  MA       Inner Thermocouple                Power  Controller                   Figure 6 5 Application Using Cascade  Control    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 121    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    To set up this application  you would do the following     1  Change the display to loop 2  which will be the second   ary loop  and then enter the three key sequence  EN   TER  then ALARM ACK  then CHNG SP  and go to the first  screen in Table 6 2     2  Follow the steps in Table 6 2 to configure cascade control     Table 6 2 Application Example  Setting Up  Cascade Control       Display    User Input       LOOP PROCESS UNITS  SETUP LOOP 02  CASCADE     ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS    OUT     Press YES to set up the cascade parameters wi
186. ng and go  to the next parameter    Start scanning mode  if pressed twice     Watlow Anafaze 53    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    54          eal CHNG  i   J SP             Do x  Ad AUTO    RAMP  SOAK SOAK       ALARM  ACK          CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Press CHNG SP to change the loop setpoint    Press MAN AUTO to    e Toggle a loop between manual and automatic control  e Adjust the output power level of manual loops   e Automatically tune the loop    If your controller has the ramp soak option  press RAMP   SOAK to     e Assign a ramp soak profile to the current loop  e Select the ramp soak mode  e See the status of a running profile    Your controller may not have the ramp soak option  If it  does not  pressing the RAMP SOAK key displays the message  OPTION UNAVATLABLE     Press ALARM ACK to   e Acknowledge an alarm condition  e Reset the global alarm output    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Displays    Bar Graph Display    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    This section discusses the controller   s main displays  bar  graph  single loop and job     On power up  the controller displays general symbolic in   formation for up to eight loops  This screen is called the bar  graph display  The diagram below shows the symbols used  in the bar graph display     Symbol f   Q PROCESS _UNITS  Loop Number O1l gt m gt an 1 lt  aK 08  or Name AAAA MAMA       ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Control Status    Figure 3 
187. ng through display 81   location in firmware 73   model number description 5  mounting  see installation    N    NO key  description 53  NO key reset 176  noise  eliminating problems with 23  isolation 23  reducing with zero cross switching 158  suppression 22 23  symptoms 22    O    on off control  control signal 157  description 154  selecting 94  spread 92  operator displays 51    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Index    OUT OF TOLRNCE ALARM TIME  description 138  location 136  233  output override 77  97  OUTPUT OVERRIDE DIG INPUT  default value 74  description 77  location 73  233  outputs  5 Vdc output power 204  alarm  see alarms  analog  see Dual DAC or Serial DAC  boost output 67  control  see control outputs  CPU watchdog timer  see CPU watchdog timer  digital  see digital outputs  filter 91  process variable retransmit  see process variable  retransmit  ramp soak ready state 139  reference voltage  see reference voltage  setup parameters 93 98  solid state relays 37  specifications 202 204  wiring  see installation  OVERRIDE DIG IN ACTIVE  default value 74  description 77  location 73  233  over temperature shutdown devices 9    P    panel  see installation  parameters  accessing 71  alarm 99 103  changing values 72  control 90 92  global 74 82  input 82 89  menu tree  see menu tree  output 93 98  process variable retransmit 113  ramp soak profile 137 143  storage ofin RAM 7  test 103  parts list 5  personal computer  see communications 174  PID  autotuning  see autotuning
188. nputs Parts List    6 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide Chapter 1  System Overview    Technical Description    This section contains a technical description of each compo   nent of your CLS200 series controller     CLS200    The CLS200 is housed in an 1 8 DIN panel mount package   It contains the CPU  RAM with a built in battery  EPROM   serial communications  digital I O  analog inputs  the  screen and touch keypad             CLS200 Series  with SCSI Connector    CLS204 or CLS208  with TB18 Connector    Figure 1 3 CLS200 Rear Views    The CLS200 has the following features   e Keypad and 2 line 16 character display     e Screw terminals for the power and analog inputs and  communications     e Input power is 12 to 24V     dc  at 1 Amp     e A50 pin SCSI cable connects the digital inputs and  outputs to the 50 terminal block  TB50   The CLS204  and CLS208 are available with an 18 terminal block   TB18  in place of the SCSI connector  as shown in Fig   ure 1 3     The firmware resides in an EPROM  See Replacing the  EPROM on page 176 for information on removing and re   placing the EPROM     The operating parameters are stored in battery backed  RAM  If there is a power loss the operating parameters are  unchanged  The battery has a ten year shelf life  and it is  not used when the unit is on     The microprocessor performs all calculations for input sig   nal linearization  PID control  alarms and communica   tions     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Wa
189. nt     The controller may fail in a 0  or 100  power  output state  To prevent death  personal inju   ry  equipment damage or property damage   install external safety shutdown devices  If  death or injury may occur  you must install  FM approved safety shutdown devices that  operate independently from the process con   trol equipment     With proper approval and installation  thermal fuses may  be used in some processes     Watlow Anafaze 9    Chapter 1  System Overview    Power Fail Protection    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    In the occurrence of a sudden loss of power  this controller  can be programmed to reset the control outputs to off  this  is the default   Typically  when power is re started  the con   troller restarts to data stored in memory  If you have pro   grammed the controller to restart with control outputs on   the memory based restart might create an unsafe process  condition for some installations  Therefore  you should only  set the restart with outputs on if you are certain your sys   tem will safely restart   See the Process Power Digital In   put on page 79      When using a computer or host device  you can program the  software to automatically reload desired operating con   stants or process values on power up  Keep in mind that  these convenience features do not eliminate the need for in   dependent safety devices     Contact Watlow Anafaze immediately if you have any ques   tions about system safety or system operation     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0
190. ntrol a wide variety of loads  They are typically used to  control SSRs or other power switching devices which in  turn control  for example  heaters  They may also be used  to signal another device of an alarm condition in the con   troller     Analog outputs may be accomplished by using Dual DAC or  Serial DAC modules in conjunction with one of the control  outputs     An open collector CPU watchdog output is also provided so  that an external device may monitor the CPU state     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 11  Specifications             Analog Outputs  No direct analog outputs are provided   The digital outputs may be used in conjunction with Dual  DAC or Serial DAC modules to provide analog signals  See  Dual DAC Specifications on page 207 and Serial DAC Spec   ifications on page 209   Digital Outputs  Table 11 17 Digital Outputs Control   Alarm  Parameter Description  Number 35  Operation Open collector output  ON state sinks to logic common    34 Outputs selectable as closed loop control or alarm control   Function    Number of Control Outputs per  PID Loop    1 global alarm output    2  maximum        Control Output Types    Time proportioning  distributed zero crossing  Serial DAC or  on off  All independently selectable for each output  Heat and  cool control outputs can be individually disabled for use as  alarm outputs       Time Proportioning Cycle Time    Control Action    1 to 255 seconds  programmable for each 
191. ntrol loop parameters ac   cording to the furnace application  in this case on loop  1     2  Select another unused PID output for retransmitting  the thermocouple value  for example  loop 2 heat out   put      3  Change the display to loop 2  and then enter the three   key sequence  ENTER  then ALARM ACK  then CHNG SP   and go to the first screen in Table 6 1     4  Follow the steps in Table 6 1 to configure the process  variable retransmit option     5  After following the steps in Table 6 1  press BACK sev   eral times until the normal loop display appears  The  controller will now produce an output on loop 2 which  is linear and proportional to the loop 1 process vari   able     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features             PV RETRANSMIT    ALARM SETPOINT       STATUS OUT        Table 6 1 Application Example  Setting Up  Process Variable Retransmit  Display User Input  LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  SETUP LOOP 02 Press YES        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT OUTPUT  RETRANS PV  01    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Enter 01 for loop 1 process variable  Press ENTER           LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  02 HEAT RETRANS  MIN INP  0    ALARM SETPOINT          STATUS OUT        Enter the minimum input value  which corresponds to the minimum  output percentage  For a range of 0 to 1000   F  set the minimum  input value to 0   F  Press ENTER           LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT RETRANS  MIN OUT   0    ALARM _ SETPOINT    ST
192. nuously present for longer than the loop alarm  delay time you set     Failed sensor alarms are affected by the loop alarm delay  even during the start up alarm delay time period     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Failed Sensor Alarms    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Failed sensor alarms alert you if one of the following condi   tions occurs     e Thermocouple open   e Thermocouple shorted  must be enabled    e Thermocouple reversed  must be enabled    e RTD open positive input or open negative input   e RTD short between the positive and negative inputs    What Happens if a Failed Sensor Alarm Occurs     Thermocouple Open Alarm    Thermocouple Reversed Alarm    Doc   0600 3050 2000    If a failed sensor alarm occurs     e The controller switches to manual mode at the output  power indicated by the SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT and  SENSOR FAIL CL OUTPUT parameters in the SETUP  LOOP OUTPUTS menu   The output power may be dif   ferent for a thermocouple open alarm  see Thermocou   ple Open Alarm on page 65      e The controller displays an alarm code and alarm mes   sage on the display  See Alarm Displays on page 58     e The global alarm output is activated     The thermocouple open alarm occurs if the controller de   tects a break in a thermocouple or its leads     If a thermocouple open alarm occurs  the controller switch   es to manual mode  The output level is determined as fol   lows     e Ifthe HEAT COOL T C BRK OUT parameter in the  SE
193. o put a profile in RUN or HOLD mode  how to reset a profile   and how to display profile statistics  Figure 7 4 shows the  ramp soak screens                                                                                                           BACK  No  Profile  Single RAmp  Assigned   ASSIGN R S  Display    i Profile  Assigned y  TIME REMAINING    BACK  RAMP   SOAK    f  BACK CYCLE NUMBER 5 a    a g  RAMP  y  SOAK  BACK SET MODE  NO  NO RESET a  Figure 7 4 Ramp Soak Screens  Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 145    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak CLS200 Series User s Guide    Ramp Soak Displays    The single loop and bar graph displays show additional  codes when ramp soak firmware is installed     Single Loop Display    When the controller is running a profile  the single loop dis   play shows the ramp soak mode where it would usually  show MAN or AUTO  Table 7 4 describes the modes     Table 7 4 Ramp Soak Single Loop Display                         oe Description  STRT The profile is in the ready segment  RUN The profile is unning   HOLD The user has put the profile in hold mod    TOHO The profile is in tole ance hold   WAIT The profile is in t igger wait state        This is the single loop display when a profile is running  If  a tolerance alarm occurs  the controller displays a flashing  T in the alarm symbol position     Process Variable    WA PROCESS WS         Loop Number T   F   nee milk  Lt 180TOHO50    Alarm Symbol Output Percentage          Setpoint Ramp Soak Mode    B
194. oblem 163  Returning Your Unit 164  Troubleshooting Controllers 164  Process and Deviation Alarms 164  Failed Sensor Alarms 166  System Alarms 166  Other Behaviors 167  Corrective and Diagnostic Procedures 168  Low Power 168  Battery Dead 168  Ambient Warning 168  H W Ambient Failure 169  H W Gain or Offset Failure 170  Keys Do Not Respond 170  Checking Analog Inputs 171  Earth Grounding 172  Checking Control Outputs 172  Testing Control Output Devices 173    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze vii    Table of Contents    Testing the TB18 and TB50 173  Testing Control and Digital Outputs 173  Testing Digital Inputs 173    CLS200 Series User s Guide    Additional Troubleshooting for Computer Supervised Systems 174    Computer Problems 174  Communications 175  Ground Loops 175  Software Problems 176  NO Key Reset 176  Replacing the EPROM 176  Changing Communications 179  Installing Scaling Resistors 180  CLS204 and CLS208 Input Circuit 180  CLS204 and CLS208 Current Inputs 181  CLS204 and CLS208 Voltage Inputs 182  CLS204 and CLS208 RTDs and Thermistors 183  CLS216 Input Circuit 184  CLS216 Current Inputs 184  CLS216 Voltage Inputs 185  Scaling and Calibration 186  Configuring Dual DAC Outputs 186  Configuring Serial DAC Outputs 188    10 Linear Scaling Examples 189    Example 1  A 4 to 20 mA Sensor 189  Example 2  A 0 to 5V   dc  Sensor 191  Example 3  A Pulse Encoder 192    11 Specifications 193    CLS200 System Specifications 193  CLS200 Processor Physical Specifications 194
195. of lower and upper limits     Recipe  See Job     Reflection Compensation Mode  A control feature that automatically corrects  the reading from a sensor     Relay  A switching device     Electromechanical Relay     A power  switching device that completes or inter   rupts a circuit by physically moving electri   cal contacts into contact with each other   Not recommended for PID control     Solid State Relay  SSR      A switching  device with no moving parts that completes  or interrupts a circuit electrically     Reset   Control action that automatically eliminates  offset or droop between setpoint and actual  process temperature  See also Integral     Automatic Reset     The integral function  of a PI or PID temperature controller that  adjusts the process temperature to the set   point after the system stabilizes  The  inverse of integral     Resistance  Opposition to the flow of electric current  mea   sured in ohms     Resistance Temperature Detector  RTD    A sensor that uses the resistance temperature  characteristic to measure temperature  There  are two basic types of RTDs  the wire RTD   which is usually made of platinum  and the  thermistor which is made of a semiconductor  material  The wire RTD is a positive tempera   ture coefficient sensor only  while the ther   mistor can have either a negative or positive    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    temperature coefficient     Reverse Action  An output control action in which an increase  in the
196. og  Timer  7 Pulse Input 8 Global Alarm  9 Output 1 Loop 1 heat   Loop 1 heat 10 Output 342  11 Output 2 Loop 2 heat   Loop 2 heat 12 Output 33  13 Output 3 Loop 3 heat Loop 3 heat 14 Output 32  15 Output 4 Loop 4 heat Loop 4 heat 16 Output 31  17 Output 5 Loop 5 heat Pulse loop heat 18 Output 30  19 Output 6 Loop 6 heat Loop 1 cool 20 Output 29  21 Output 7 Loop 7 heat   Loop 2 cool 22 Output 28  23 Output 8 Loop 8 heat Loop 3 cool 24 Output 27  25 Output 9 Pulse loop Loop 4 cool 26 Output 26  heat  27 Output 10 Loop 1 cool Pulse loop cool 28 Output 25  29 Output 11 Loop 2 cool 30 Output 24  31 Output 12 Loop 3 cool 32 Output 23  33 Output 13 Loop 4 cool 34 Output 22  35 Output 14 Loop 5 cool 36 Output 21  37 Output 15 Loop 6 cool 38 Output 20  39 Output 16 Loop 7 cool 40 Output 19  41 Output 17 Loop 8 cool 42 Output 18 Pulse  loop cool  43 Input 1 44 Input 2  45 Input 3 46 Input 4  47 Input 5 48 Input 6  49 Input 7 50 Input 8                               Doc   0600 3050 2000    1 The indicated outputs are dedicated for control when enabled in  the loop setup  If one or both of a loop   s outputs are disabled  the  corresponding digital outputs become available for alarms or   ramp soak events     2 f you install a Watlow Anafaze Serial DAC  the controller uses    digital output 34  terminal 10  for a clock line  You cannot use out   put 34 for anything else when you have a Serial DAC installed     Watlow Anafaze    41    Chapter 2  Installation    CLS200 Series User   s Gu
197. ol 61  Autotuning a Loop 62  Using Alarms 64  Alarm Delay 64  Failed Sensor Alarms 65  Process Alarms 66  Global Alarm 68  Ramp Soak 69    4 Setup 71    How to Access the Setup Menus 71  How to Change a Parameter 72  Setup Global Parameters Menu 74  Load Setup From Job 75  Save Setup to Job 75  Job Select Digital Inputs 76    Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide Table of Contents    Job Select Digital Inputs Active 77  Output Override Digital Input 77  Override Digital Input Active 77  Startup Alarm Delay 78  Keyboard Lock Status 78  Power Up Output Status 78  Process Power Digital Input 79  Controller Address 79  Communications Baud Rate 80  Communications Protocol 80  Communications Error Checking 80  AC Line Frequency 81  Digital Output Polarity on Alarm 81  EPROM Information 81  Setup Loop Input Menu 82  Input Type 83  Loop Name 84  Input Units 84  Input Reading Offset 84  Reversed T C Detection 85  Input Pulse Sample Time 85  Linear Scaling Parameters 86  Input Filter 89  Setup Loop Control Parameters Menu 90  Heat or Cool Control PB 91  Heat or Cool Control TI 91  Heat or Cool Control TD 91  Heat or Cool Output Filter 91  Spread 92  Restore PID Digital Input 92  Setup Loop Outputs Menu 93  Enable or Disable Heat or Cool Outputs 94  Heat or Cool Output Type 94  Heat or Cool Cycle Time 95  SDAC Mode 95  SDAC Low Value 95  SDAC High Value 95  Heat or Cool Output Action 96  Heat or Cool Output Limit 96  Heat or
198. omatic Mode   A feature that allows the controller to set PID  control outputs in response to the Process  Variable  PV  and the setpoint     Autotune   A feature that automatically sets temperature  control PID values to match a particular ther   mal system     AWG  See American Wire Gauge     B    Baud Rate  The rate of information transfer in serial com   munications  measured in bits per second     Block Check Character  BCC    A serial communications error checking  method  An acceptable method for most appli   cations  BCC is the default method  See also  Cyclic Redundancy Check     Bumpless Transfer   A smooth transition from automatic  closed  loop  to manual  open loop  operation  The con   trol output does not change during the trans   fer     Watlow Anafaze 213    Glossary    Cc    Calibration  The comparison of a measuring device  an  unknown  against an equal or better standard     Celsius  Centigrade   Formerly known as Centigrade  A temperature  scale in which water freezes at 0  C and boils at  100  C at standard atmospheric pressure  The  formula for conversion to the Fahrenheit scale     F    1 8 x   C    32     Central Processing Unit  CPU    The unit of a computing system that includes  the circuits controlling the interpretation of  instructions and their execution     Circuit   Any closed path for electrical current  A config   uration of electrically or electromagnetically   connected components or devices     Closed Loop   A control system that uses a 
199. on  See Bar Graph Display on                page 146   Table 3 2 Control Status Symbols on the Bar  Graph and Single Loop Displays  Bar Graph a  Display Display Description  Symbol Symbol   M MAN One or both outputs are  enabled  Loop is in manual con   trol    A AUTO Only one output  heat or cool  is  enabled  Loop is in automatic  control    T TUNE The loop is in autotune mode    H HEAT Both heat and cool outputs are   T enabled  Loop is in automatic  control and heating    C COOL Both heat and cool outputs are   L enabled  Loop is in automatic  control and cooling    Both outputs disabled  or input   blank   blank    type is set to SKIP                    Navigating in Bar Graph Display    When the bar graph display is visible   e Press the YES  up  or NO  down  key to see a new group    of loops     e Press ENTER twice to scan all groups of loops  The  groups will display sequentially for three seconds  each  This is called scanning mode     e Press any key to stop scanning     e Press BACK once to go to the job display  if enabled  or  the single loop display     56 Watlow Anafaze    Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Single Loop Display    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    The single loop display shows detailed information for one  loop at a time     Process Variable    UNITS             Loop Number  or Name       Engineering  Units  80AUTO100    SETPOINT       STAY OUT        Output  Setpoint Control Status Percentage    Figure 3 4 Single Loop Display
200. ons  depending upon protocol             Form of ANSI X3 28 1976  D1  F1   compatible with Allen Bra                 Prorgagl dley PLC  full duplex or Modbus RTU  Table 11 22 Processor Power Requirements  Parameter Description  Voltage 15 to 24V   dc      3V   dc     Maximum Current          1A          204    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 11  Specifications    CLS200 Power Supply    Complete specifications for the CLS200 power supply  are available at www watlow com  See the links on the  CLS200 page     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 205    Chapter 11  Specifications CLS200 Series User s Guide    206 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 11  Specifications    Dual DAC Specifications    Doc   0600 3050 2000    The Watlow Anafaze Dual DAC  digital to analog convert   er  is an optional module for the CLS200 series controller   The Dual DAC converts a distributed zero crossing  DZC   output signal to an analog process control signal  Watlow  Anafaze provides the following version of the Dual DAC     e 4to 20 mAdc  e Oto 5V   de   e Oto 10V   de     Table 11 29 Dual DAC Environmental Specifi   cations       Storage Temperature  20 to 60   C       Operating Temperature 0 to 50   C          Humidity 10 to 95  non condensing          Table 11 30 Dual DAC Physical Specifications                      Weight 0 42 Ib  0 19 kg  Length 4 4 inches 112 mm  Width 3 6 inches 91 mm  Height 1 8 inches 44 mm  
201. ons on PC Board 178   Figure 9 3   EPROM Location 178   Figure 9 4   Remove EPROM 178   Figure 9 5   Jumper Configurations 179   Figure 9 6   CLS204 and CLS208 Input Circuit 181   Figure 9 7   CLS216 Input Circuit 184   Figure 9 8   Dual DAC 187   Figure 9 9   Serial DAC Voltage Current Jumper Positions 188    11 Specifications    Figure 11 1   CLS200 Processor Module Dimensions 194   Figure 11 2   CLS200 Clearances with Straight SCSI Cable 195  Figure 11 3   CLS200 Clearances with Right Angle SCSI Cable 195  Figure 11 4   TB50 Dimensions 197   Figure 11 5   TB50 Dimensions with Straight SCSI Cable 198  Figure 11 6   TB50 Dimensions with Right Angle SCSI Cable 199  Figure 11 7   Power Supply Dimensions  Bottom View  206   Figure 11 8   Dual DAC Dimensions 207   Figure 11 9   Serial DAC Dimensions 209    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze Xi    List of Figures CLS200 Series User   s Guide    xii Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    List of Tables    2 Installation    Table 2 1   Cable Recommendations 22   Table 2 2   Power Connections 26   Table 2 3   Digital Output States and Values Stored in the Controller 36  Table 2 4   Digital Inputs States and Values Stored in the Controller 39  Table 2 5   TB18 Connections 40   Table 2 6   TB50 Connections for CLS204 and CLS208 41   Table 2 7   TB50 Connections for CLS216 42   Table 2 8   EIA TIA 232 Connections 46   Table 2 9   RTS CTS Pins in DB 9 and DB 25 Connectors 46    3 Using the CLS200    Table 3 1   Bar Graph Display Symbol
202. ool span of the secondary loop  For this example we will  assume no low side adjustment to the setpoint  so the cool span is  0   F  Press ENTER           122    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide     BASE SP   HT SPAN      BASE SP     Secondary Loop Setpoint     eng  units     SP  Setpoint  PB  Proportional Band    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    3  Press BACK several times until the normal loop display  appears  The output percentage of loop 1 will now con   trol the setpoint of loop 2     To verify that cascade is working as expected  you would  follow these steps     1  Setloop 1 to MANUAL and the OUTPUT to 0   Loop 2 set   point should equal 150  BASE SP      2  Adjust loop 1 MANUAL OUTPUT to 50   Loop 2 setpoint  should equal 170  BASE SP   50  of HT SPAN     3  Adjust loop 1 MANUAL OUTPUT to 100   Loop 2 set   point should equal 190  BASE SP  HT SPAN      4  To complete the cascade setup  both loop 1 and loop 2  must be configured for inputs  outputs  and alarms     In addition  the PID parameters of loop 1 must be tuned to  produce the desired effect for the application on the set   point of loop 2  For a cascade control application that uses  the secondary loop for PID control  loop 1 typically uses  only proportional mode  This must be set for the amount of  change in the process variable to cause a 100  change in  the output level     The proportional band is selected so the setpoint of the sec   ondary loop 
203. oop Outputs Menu on page 93 for help enabling  and disabling heat and cool outputs        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 01  CONTROL PARAMS     ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Table 4 10 shows the parameters available in the SETUP  LOOP CONTROL PARAMS menu              Table 4 10 Setup Loop Control Parameters                                     Parameter Default Value   HEAT CONTROL PB  Depends upon the INPUT TYPE setting  50 for J type thermocouple    HEAT CONTROL TI  Depends upon the INPUT TYPE setting  180 SEC R for J type ther   mocouple    HEAT CONTROL TD  0   HEAT CONTROL FILTER    3   COOL CONTROL PB 50   COOL CONTROL TI  Depends upon the INPUT TYPE setting  60 SEC R for J type ther   mocouple    COOL CONTROL TD  Depends upon the INPUT TYPE setting  0 SECONDS for J type ther   mocouple    COOL CONTROL FILTER    3   SPREAD  5   RESTORE PID DIGIN  NONE                90    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Heat or Cool Control PB    Heat or Cool Control TI    Heat or Cool Control TD    Heat or Cool Output Filter    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 4  Setup    Set the proportional band  also known as gain   A larger  value yields less proportional action for a given deviation  from setpoint        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT CONTROL    PB   50    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Dependent upon sensor type     The controller internally represents the proportional band   PB  as a gain value  When you edit the pro
204. op   s Setpoint    NOTE  Cascade control cannot be used on the same  control loop as ratio control  However  both  features may be used in the same multiloop  controller     Setup Loop Cascade Menu    The setup parameters for cascade control appear under the  SETUP LOOP CASCADE menu     LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  SETUP LOOP 02  CASCADE     ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT                 Press YES to set up the cascade parameters  The loop cur   rently displayed  loop 02 in this case  will be the secondary  control loop  which performs the actual control     Primary Loop    Enter the primary loop number  The output percentage of  this loop will control the setpoint of the secondary loop     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 CASCADE    PRIM  LOOP  03    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any loop except the secondary loop     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 119    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Base Setpoint    Minimum Setpoint    Maximum Setpoint    120    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Enter the setpoint that corresponds to 0   heat and cool   output from the primary loop  PRIM  LOOP   This value is  expressed in the same engineering units as the secondary  loop   s process variable     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 CASCADE       BASE SP  25          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value from the secondary loop   s  minimum process variable to its maximum process vari   able     Enter the lowest value of the secondary loop setpoint  This  minimum set
205. or 167  TUNE 56  61  64  tuning control loops 159 161    U    UL  see agency compliance  under temperature shutdown devices 9  unlocking the keypad 78   up arrow key 53    V    voltage inputs  ranges 202  resistance 202  scaling resistors 32  182  185  wiring 32    W  weight  controller 194  Dual DAC 207  power supply 205  Serial DAC 209  TB50 196  wire sizes  controller 196  wiring  see installation    Y  YES key 53    process variable incorrect on display 167  171    sensor inputs 171  software 176  TB18 173   TB50 173    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze    231    Index CLS200 Series User s Guide    232 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    Menu Structure          SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS  p  74     SETUP LOOP INPUT  p  82     SETUP LOOP CONTROL PARAMS  p  90     SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS  p  93     SETUP LOOP ALARMS  p  99     MANUAL I O TEST  p  103           LOAD SETUP FROM JOB INPUT TYPE HEAT CONTROL PB HEAT CONTROL OUTPUT HI PROC ALARM SETPT DIGITAL INPUTS  SAVE SETUP TO JOB LOOP NAME HEAT CONTROL TI HEAT OUTPUT TYPE HI PROC ALARM TYPE TEST DIGITAL OUTPUT  JOB SELECT DIG INPUTS INPUT UNITS HEAT CONTROL TD HEAT OUTPUT CYCLE TIME HI PROC ALARM OUTPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT NUMBER XX       JOB SEL DIG INS ACTIVE    INPUT READING OFFSET    HEAT CONTROL FILTER    SDAC MODE    DEV ALARM VALUE    KEYPAD TEST       OUTPUT OVERRIDE DIG INPUT    REVERSED T C DETECT    COOL CONTROL PB    SDAC LO VALUE    HI DEV ALARM TYPE    TEST DISPLAY             OVERRIDE DIG IN ACTIVE INPUT PULSE SAMP
206. or EIA TIA 485 signals to be transmitted proper   ly  each pair must be properly terminated  The value of the  termination resistor should be equal to the impedance of  the communications cable used  Values are typically 150 to  200 Q     The receive lines at the converter or host device should be  terminated in the converter  the connector to the host de   vice or the device itself  Typically the converter documenta   tion provides instructions for termination     Use a terminating resistor on the receive lines on the last   controller on the 485 line  Set JU1 inside the CLS200 in po   sition B to connect a 200 Q resistor across the receive lines   Refer to Changing Communications on page 179     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    EIA TIA 485 Converters and Laptop Computers    In order for an EJA TIA 232 to 485 converter to optically  isolate the computer from the 485 network  the 232 and 485  sides must be powered independently  Many 232 to 485  converters can be powered by the computer   s communica   tions port  Some computers  laptops in particular  do not  automatically provide the appropriate voltages  These com   puter converter combinations can usually be used by con   necting an external power supply to the 232 side of the  converter  Not all converters have power inputs for the 232  side  however     NOTE  When using Anasoft with a laptop computer   choose a converter with an external 232 pow   er input  Ana
207. orms     Distributed Zero                                                                   Time Proportioning  30   Crossing  33    On  Off  0 3 10 Os 1 3 4 6  Seconds  Cycle Time set to 10 AC Cycle    Figure 8 5 Time Proportioning and Distributed  Zero Crossing Waveforms    Watlow Anafaze 157    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control CLS200 Series User s Guide    Distributed Zero Crossing  DZC     With DZC outputs  the PID algorithm calculates an output  between 0 and 100   but the output is distributed on a  variable time base  For each ac line cycle  the controller de   cides whether the power should be on or off  There is no  fixed cycle time since the decision is made for each line cy   cle  When used in conjunction with a zero crossing device   such as a solid state relay  SSR   switching is done only at  the zero crossing of the ac line  which helps reduce electri   cal noise     Using a DZC output should extend the life of heaters  Since  the time period for 60 Hz power is 16 6 ms  the switching  interval is very short and the power is applied uniformly   DZC should be used with SSRs  Do not use DZC output for  electromechanical relays     The combination of DZC output and a solid state relay can  inexpensively approach the effect of analog  phase angle  fired control  Note  however  DZC switching does not limit  the current and voltage applied to the heater as phase an   gle firing does     Three Phase Distributed Zero Crossing  3P DZC     This output type performs exactly t
208. orque   4 4 to 5 3 in lb   0 5 to 0 6 Nm        SCSI Connector on          Board SCSI 2 female  Output Terminals Captive screw cage clamp  Multiconductor cables  24 AWG  l  0 2 mm    Output Wire Gauge    Single wire  22 to 18 AWG   0 5 to 0 75 mm         Output Terminal Torque   4 4 to 5 3 in lb   0 5 to 0 6 Nm                 Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 197    Chapter 11  Specifications    198    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 11 9 TB50 with Straight SCSI                   Length 6 4 inches 163 mm  Width 4 0 inches 102 mm  Height 1 5 inches 37 mm                    CooCoo Coosa                    DON G8 GG8GG9                    Figure 11 5 TB50 Dimensions with Straight  SCSI Cable    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 11  Specifications    Table 11 10 TB50 with Right Angle SCSI                                                                                           Length 5 4 inches 137 mm  Width 4 0 inches 102 mm  Height 1 5 inches 37mm  A  5 4 in  8   137 mm   of L Q     co    co     co co     co lol co    co    co     co    co     Ee o    s  sls  je       co   coe D     co    co  co    co  LEBIR  ee   N     co     co  S  co  _ 9  Seat   102 mm  Q 1 5 in    37 mm                 Figure 11 6 TB50 Dimensions with Right Angle  SCSI Cable    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 199    Chapter 11  Specifications    Inputs    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The controller accepts analog sensor inputs which are mea   sured
209. ou need to return  the unit to Watlow Anafaze for testing and repair  Custom   er Service will issue you an RMA number  See Returning  Your Unit on page 164     Before trying to troubleshoot a problem by    replacing your controller with another one   first check the installation  If you have short   ed sensor inputs to high voltage lines or a  transformer is shorted out  and you replace  the controller  you will risk damage to the  new controller     Watlow Anafaze 163    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    If you are certain the installation is correct  you can try re   placing the controller  If the second unit works correctly   then the problem is specific to the controller you replaced     Returning Your Unit    Before returning a controller  contact your supplier or call  Watlow for technical support     Controllers purchased as part of a piece of equipment must  be serviced or returned through the equipment manufac   turer  Equipment manufacturers and authorized distribu   tors should call customer service to obtain a return  materials authorization  RMA  number  Shipments with   out an RMA will not be accepted  Other users should con   tact their suppliers for instructions on returning products  for repair     Troubleshooting Controllers    A problem may be indicated by one or more of several types  of symptoms     e A process or deviation alarm   e A failed sensor alarm   e Asystem alarm   e Unexpected or undesired behavior    T
210. output    Reverse  heat  or direct  cool   independently selectable for  each output       Off State Leakage Current     lt 0 01 mA to dc common       Maximum Current    Maximum Voltage Switched          60 mA for each output  5V power supply  from the processor  module  can supply up to 350 mA total to all outputs    24V   dc           Table 11 18 CPU Watchdog Output          Parameter Description  Number 1  Operation Open collector output  ON state sinks to logic common  Function Monitors the processor module microprocessor       Maximum Current    10 mA  5V power supply in the processor module can supply  up to 350 mA total to all outputs        Maximum Voltage Switched          5V   dc           Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze 203    Chapter 11  Specifications    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 11 19 5V   dc  Output  Power to Operate  Solid State Relays        Parameter    Voltage    Description    5V   dc           Maximum Current          350 mA       Table 11 20 Reference Voltage Output  Power  to Operate Bridge Circuit Sensors        Parameter    Voltage    Description    5V   dc           Maximum Current          100 mA       Table 11 21 Processor Serial Interface                Parameter Description  Type EIA TIA 232 3 wire or EIA TIA 485 4 wire  Isolation None  Baud Rate 2 400  9 600 or 19 200 user selectable  Error Check BCC or CRC  user selectable    1 with EIA TIA 232 communications  up to 32 with EIA     Number of Controllers    TIA 485 communicati
211. output test in the MANUAL I 0 TEST  menu to turn the digital output on and off   See Test  Digital Output on page 104 and Digital Output Num   ber on page 104   When the output is ON  the output  voltage should be less than 1V  When the output is  OFF  the output voltage should be between 4 75 and  5 25V     NOTE  By default  heat outputs are enabled  Only  disabled outputs may be turned on using the  manual I O test  To test heat outputs  set the  corresponding loop to manual mode 100   output  See Selecting the Control Status on  page 61     28 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 2  Installation    Digital Input Test    Use the following procedure to test digital inputs before  connecting to field devices     1  Disconnect any system wiring from the input to be  tested     2  Gotothe DIGITAL INPUTS test in the MANUAL I 0  TEST menu   See Digital Inputs on page 103   This test  shows whether the digital inputs are H  high  or open   or L  low  or closed      3  Attach a wire to the terminal of the digital input you  want to test  See tables 2 5 to 2 7 on pages 40 to 42 for  connections     a  When the wire is connected only to the digital in   put terminal  the digital input test should show  that the input is H  high  or open      b  When you connect the other end of the wire to the  controller common  TB50 terminal 3 or TB18 ter   minal 2   the digital input test should show that  the input is L  low  or closed      Sensor Wiring    Th
212. pin and 9   pin connectors or cables that are supplied by the factory   EIA TIA 232 may be used to connect a computer through a    232 485 converter  to an EIA TIA 485 communications net   work with up to 32 CLS200 controllers     Watlow Anafaze 45    Chapter 2  Installation CLS200 Series User s Guide    Table 2 8 EIA TIA 232 Connections             Wire CLS200 DB 9 DB 25   Color TB1 Connector Connector  White TX Pin 26 RX Pin 2 RX Pin 3  Red RX Pin 25 TX Pin 3 TX Pin 2    Black GND Pin 23 GND Pin 5 GND Pin 7       Green GND Pin 24 N U Pin 9 N U Pin 22                      Shield N C GND Pin 5 GND Pin 7    Jumpers in EIA TIA 232 Connectors    Some software programs and some operator interface ter   minals require a Clear to Send  CTS  signal in response to  their Request to Send  RTS  signal  or a Data Set Ready   DSR  in response to their Data Terminal Ready  DTR    The CLS200 is not configured to receive or transmit these  signals  To use such software with the CLS200  jumper the  RTS to the CTS and the DTR to the DSR in the DB connec   tor  Table 2 9 lists the standard pin assignments for DB 9  and DB 25 connectors     Table 2 9 RTS CTS Pins in DB 9 and DB 25                   Connectors  DB 9 DB 25  RTS 7 4  CTS 8 5  DTR 4 20  DSR 6 6                Cables manufactured by Watlow Anafaze for EIA TIA 232  communications include these jumpers  Neither AnaWin  nor Anasoft software requires these jumpers           Figure 2 31 Connecting One CLS200 to a Com   puter Using EIA TI
213. point overrides any calculation caused by the  primary loop calling for a lower setpoint  This value is ex   pressed in the same engineering units as the secondary  loop   s process variable     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 CASCADE       MIN SP  25          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value from the secondary loop   s  minimum process variable to its maximum process vari   able     Enter the highest value of the secondary loop setpoint  This  maximum setpoint overrides any calculation caused by the  primary loop calling for a higher setpoint  This value is ex   pressed in the same engineering units as the secondary  loop   s process variable           LOOP PROCESS UNITS  02 CASCADE  MAX SP  180       ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  Any value from the secondary loop   s  minimum process variable to its maximum process vari   able     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Heat Span  Enter the multiplier to apply to the primary loop heat out   put percentage     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 CASCADE    HT SPAN   9999    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values    9999 to  9999        Cool Span    Enter the multiplier to apply to the primary loop cool out   put percentage     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 CASCADE       CL SPAN   9999    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values    9999 to  9999     Cascade Control Example  Water Tank    A tank of water has an in
214. portional band   you will see the values change in predefined steps  small  steps for narrow proportional band values and large steps  for wide proportional band values     The controller calculates the default proportional band for  each input type according to the following equation      High Range   Low Range     Default PB  Gain    Set the integral term  also known as reset   A larger value  yields less integral action     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT CONTROL          TI   180 SEC R    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0  off  to 6000 seconds           Set the derivative constant  A larger value yields greater  derivative action        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT CONTROL    TD   0    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 255 seconds     Dampen the response of the heat or cool output  The output  responds to a step change by going to approximately 2 3 of  its final value within the number of scans you set here  A    Watlow Anafaze 91    Chapter 4  Setup    Spread    Restore PID Digital Input    92       CLS200 Series User   s Guide    larger value results in a slower  or more dampened  re   sponse to changes in the process variable     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT CONTROL    FILTER   3    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 255  0 disables the output filter     For a loop using on off control  the spread is the control hys   teresis  This determines the difference between the point at  which a heat output turns o
215. primary signal  The signal can  also be used as an input to other types of control systems  such as a PLC     Any available output  heat or cool  may be used as a re   transmit output  Any process variable  including the same  loop number input  may be retransmitted    The controller output signal must be connected to a Dual  DAC or Serial DAC converter to get a 4 to 20 mA   dc  or  0 to 5V   dc  signal  The choice of converter depends on ap   plication requirements    The process variable retransmit feature is included in both  the ramp soak and enhanced features options     NOTE  If an output is defined as a process variable  retransmit  it cannot be used for PID control     Setup Loop Process Variable Retransmit Menu    The setup parameters for the process variable retransmit  feature appear in the SETUP LOOP PV RETRANSMIT menu        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 02  PV RETRANSMIT     ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Press YES to view the process variable retransmit parame   ters     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 113    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Retransmit Process Variable    Enter the number of the loop that provides the process  variable for the retransmit calculation        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    02 HEAT OUTPUT  RETRANS PV  02    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT              If you set this parameter NONE and press NO  the controller  skips to the COOL OUTPUT RETRANS PV screen  The COOL  parameter is set up the same way as
216. put  that is not being used for PID control or for Serial DAC  clock     This parameter appears only if you answered YES to EDIT  SEG EVENTS        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEG 20 EVENT 3  OUTPUT  30    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  Any digital output from 1 to 34  except  those in use  or NONE  no event     When you are done setting segment events  press BACK to  return to EDIT SEG EVENTS  then press NO to go to the  next parameter     Assign a state to the event  At the end of the segment  the  output goes to the state you assign here     This parameter appears only if you answered YES to EDIT  SEG EVENTS        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEG20 EV3 DO 30    ACTIVE STATE  OFF    ALARM __ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  OFF  high  or ON  low      Watlow Anafaze 141    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Edit Segment Triggers    Trigger Input Number    Trigger Active State    142    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Each segment may have up to two triggers  digital inputs    Both triggers must be true in order for the segment to run   If a trigger is not true  the profile goes into the trigger wait  state        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A SEGMENT 15    EDIT SEG TRGGRS     ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Press YES to edit triggers for the current segment  or NO  to advance to the SEGMENT TOLERANCE parameter     Assign a digital input to a segment trigger  You can assign  any digital input to any trigger  You can also assign the  same digital input as a t
217. r screw terminals 26  typical 12  wire recommendations 21  30  35  47  wire sizes 22  wiring 21 27  29 49   integral  description 155  guidelines for setting 160 162  setting a value 91  settings from other controllers 161  term versus reset settings 160    J  JOB RUNNING 60  JOB RUNNING DATA MODIFIED 60  JOB RUNNING REMOTELY LOADED 60  JOB SEL DIG INS ACTIVE  default value 74  description 77  location 73  233  JOB SELECT DIG INPUTS  default value 74  description 76  location 73  233  jobs  loading from memory 75  remote selection 76 77  saving to memory 75  jumpers  Dual DAC 187  EIA TIA 232 179  EIA TIA 485 179  in EJA TIA 232 connectors 46  power supply common 27  Serial DAC 188  unused inputs 30  when using 2 wire RTD 32    K    KEYBOARD LOCK STATUS  default value 74  description 78  location 73  233    226    Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    keypad  ALARM ACK  see ALARM ACK key  BACK  see BACK key  CHNG SP  see CHNG SP key  ENTER  see ENTER key  keys do not work 167  170  locking 78  MAN AUTO  see MAN AUTO key  NO  see NO key  overview 52  RAMP SOAK  see RAMP SOAK key  testing 105  unlocking 78  YES  see YES key  KEYPAD TEST  description 105  how to quit 105  location 73  233    L    LD alarm code 164   limit controller 9   limit  output 96   linear inputs  decimal shift in ramp soak parameters 145  display format 87  engineering units 84  scaling and calibration 186  scaling examples 189 192  scaling parameters 86 89   LO DEV ALARM OUTPUT  default value 9
218. re 11 3 CLS200 Clearances with  Right Angle SCSI Cable    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Watlow Anafaze    195    Chapter 11  Specifications    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 11 6 Processor Connections       Power Terminals  TB2     Captive screw cage clamp       Power Wire Gauge  TB2     22 to 18 AWG  0 5 to 0 75 mm         Power Terminal Torque  TB2     4 4 to 5 3 in Ib   0 5 to 0 6 Nm        Sensor Terminals  TB1     Captive screw cage clamp       Sensor Wire Gauge  TB1     Thermocouples  20 AWG  0 5 mm    Linear  22 to 20 AWG  0 5 mm    Communications  24 AWG  0 2 mm         Sensor Terminal Torque  TB1     4 4 to 5 3 in Ib   0 5 to 0 6 Nm        Output Terminals  TB18     Captive screw cage clamp       Output Wire Gauge  TB18     Multiconductor cables  24 AWG  0 2 mm    Single wire  22 to 18 AWG  0 5 to 0 75 mm         Output Terminal Torque  TB18     SCSI Connector          4 4 to 5 3 in lb   0 5 to 0 6 Nm   SCSI 2 female          TB50 Physical Specifications    196    Table 11 7 TB50 Physical Dimensions                      Weight 0 32 Ib  0 15 kg  Length 4 1 inches 104 mm  Width 4 0 inches 102 mm  Height 1 5 inches 37 mm       Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 11  Specifications    4 1 in      104 mm                       808888808880   BUBERRRR BEBE     208 008 008088                    DY     RUBBEBREGREBREE    d                1 5 in    37 mm     Figure 11 4 TB50 Dimensions    Table 11 8 TB50 Connections       Screw Terminal T
219. readings are erratic  look for sources of electrical  noise  See Noise Suppression on page 22    e Eliminate possible ground loops  See Ground Loops on  page 24    e Contact your supplier for further troubleshooting  guidance  See Returning Your Unit on page 164     To check control outputs    e Set the loop you want to check to manual mode    e Set the output power percentage to the desired level    e Set the output type to ON OFF or TP  see Chapter 4   Setup      If the control output is not connected to an output device  like an SSR  connect an LED in series with a 1 kQ resistor  from  5V to the output   Tie the anode of the LED to  5V    The LED should be off when the output is 0  and on when  the output is 100      Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Testing Control Output Devices    Testing the TB18 and TB50    Testing Control and Digital    Testing Digital Inputs    Connect the solid state relay  SSR  control terminals to the  CLS200 control output and connect a light bulb  or other  load that can easily be verified  to the output terminals on  the SSR  Put the loop in manual mode and set the output  to 100   The ac load should turn on     Do not attempt to measure ac voltage at the SSR   s output  terminals  Without a load connected  the SSR   s output ter   minals do not turn off  This makes it difficult to determine  whether the SSR is actually working  Measure the voltage  across a lo
220. rect   ly  Below are some tips on how to recognize and avoid prob   lems with EMI     For earth ground wire  use a large gauge and keep the  length as short as possible  Additional shielding may be    achieved by connecting a chassis ground strap from the  panel to CLS200 case     If your controller displays the following symptoms  suspect  EMI     e The controller s display blanks out and then reenergiz   es as if power had been turned off for a moment     e The process variable does not display correctly     EMI may also damage the digital output circuit   so digital  outputs will not turn on  If the digital output circuit is dam   aged  return the controller to Watlow Anafaze for repair     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Avoiding RFI EMI    Chapter 2  Installation    To avoid or eliminate most RFI EMI noise problems     Connect the CLS200 case to earth ground  The  CLS200 system includes noise suppression circuitry   This circuitry requires proper grounding     Separate the 120 or 240V   ac  power leads from the  low level input and output leads connected to the  CLS200 series controller  Do not run the digital I O or  control output leads in bundles with ac wires     Where possible  use solid state relays  SSRs  instead  of electromechanical relays  If you must use electro   mechanical relays  try to avoid mounting them in the  same panel as the CLS200 series equipment     If you must use electromechanical relays and you  must place
221. rigger in more than one segment  and more than one profile     This parameter appears only if you answered YES to EDIT  SEG TRGGRS        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  A SEG 15 TRIG 1  INPUT NR   NONE    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  Any digital input from 1 to 8  or NONE   disable trigger      When you are done editing segment triggers  press BACK  to return to EDIT SEG TRGGRS     Choose the state that will satisfy the trigger condition  A  trigger input is ON when pulled low by an external device   A trigger input is OFF when the digital input is high     This parameter appears only if you answered YES to EDIT  SEG TRGGRS        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  A SEGO1 TR1 DI08  ACTIVE STATE 0FF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT              Selectable values  OFF or ON     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Trigger Latch Status  Choose whether the trigger is latched or unlatched   e A latched trigger is checked once  at the beginning of a  segment     e An unlatched trigger is checked constantly while a  segment is running  If an unlatched trigger becomes  false  the segment timer stops and the loop goes into  trigger wait state     When using two triggers with a segment  the following log   ic applies     Table 7 2 Trigger Latch Logic       Trigger Settings Trigger Logic       Both Triggers Latched ORed Trigger starts a segment       Both Triggers Unlatched  ANDed Triggers start continue a segment       One Trigger 
222. rn     e Press YES to toggle the pixel pattern     e Press NO to end the test and return to the top of  the MANUAL I 0 TEST menu     Watlow Anafaze 105    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    106 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000       Extruder Control    This chapter explains the additional features for the  CLS200 series controller equipped with Extruder Control  Firmware  Except for setup  default and control algorithm  differences described below  the Extruder Control Firm   ware operates the same as the standard control firmware     Setup Loop Outputs Menu    The SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu contains a parameter  with descriptors for the selections that are different than  those in the standard control firmware     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 01    OUTPUTS         ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Cool Output Nonlinear Output Curve    Select linear or nonlinear output curves for the cool output        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 COOL OUTPUT       FAN    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Selectable Values  FAN  OIL or H20  See Figure 5 1     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 107    Chapter 5  Extruder Control    Defaults    108    NOTE     CLS200 Series User   s Guide             Calculated by PID    Figure 5 1 Cool Output Nonlinear Output  Curve    The COOL OUTPUT parameter is located in the SETUP  LOOP OUTPUTS menu  Select one of three nonlinear or lin   ear output curves for cooling     The Extruder Control Firmware uses different defaults for  some par
223. rror message returns  check that the power  supplied to the controller is at least 12 0V     dc    1 A   See Wiring the Power Supply on page 25     4  Ifthe error message returns again  make a record of  the settings if possible  using software   Then  perform  a NO key reset  see NO Key Reset on page 176      5  Ifthe error is not cleared  contact your supplier for fur   ther troubleshooting guidance  See Returning Your  Unit on page 164     The dead battery alarm indicates that the CLS200 battery  is not functioning correctly or has low power or no power  If  this alarm occurs  parameters have reset to the factory de   fault settings     The controller will retain its settings when    powered  The battery is required to keep the  settings in memory only when the controller  is powered down     If the controller displays BATTERY DEAD   1  Acknowledge the alarm     2  If the error message remains  turn the power to the  controller off  then on again     3  Ifthe error message returns when power is restored   perform a NO key reset  See NO Key Reset on page 176     4  Ifthe erroris not cleared  contact your supplier for fur   ther troubleshooting guidelines  See Returning Your  Unit on page 164     The ambient warning alarm indicates that the ambient  temperature of the controller is too hot or too cold  Ambient  warning occurs when the controller   s temperature is in the    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    H W Ambient Failure    Doc   06
224. rted alarm occurs if the controller detects that  the positive and negative RTD leads are shorted     You do not have to set any parameters for the RTD alarms     Restore Automatic Control After a Sensor Failure    Process Alarms    Setting Up Alarms    66    This feature returns a loop to automatic control after a  failed sensor is repaired  To enable this feature     e Choose a digital input for the RESTORE PID DIGIN  parameter in the SETUP LOOP CONTROL PARAMS  menu     e Connect the digital input to the dc common terminal  on the controller     The CLS200 has four process alarms  each of which you can  configure separately for each loop     e     Low process alarm  e High process alarm  e Low deviation alarm  e High deviation alarm    To set up an alarm    e Set the alarm setpoint  limit   e Set the alarm type   e Choose an output  if desired  e Set the alarm deadband   e Set an alarm delay  if desired    The setpoints  deviation alarm values  and deadband all  use the same decimal format as the loop   s process variable     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    What Happens If a Process Alarm Occurs     Process Alarm Outputs    Alarm Type  Control or Alarm    High and Low Process Alarms    Doc   0600 3050 2000    If a process alarm occurs  the controller does the following     e Shows an alarm code on the display   See Alarm Dis   plays on page 58       e   Activates the global alarm output   See Global Alarm
225. s   SSRs accept a 3 to 32V      dc  input for control  and some can switch up to 100 Amps  at 480 V   ac   For larger currents  use silicon control rec   tifier  SCR  power controllers up to 1000 Amps at 120 to  600V   ac   You can also use SCRs and a Serial DAC for  phase angle fired control    The 34 control and alarm outputs are open collector out   puts referenced to the CLS200   s common  Each output  sinks up to 60 mA  dc  to the controller common when on     Control outputs are SINK outputs  They are  Low when the output is ON  Connect them to  the negative side of solid state relays     Figure 2 23 shows sample heat  cool and alarm output con   nections                                            TB50 orTB18   SSR SSR SSR               Heat Output  Cool Output a  Alarm Output   5V   dc  e             Figure 2 23 Sample Heat  Cool and Alarm  Output Connections    Watlow Anafaze 37    Chapter 2  Installation    CPU Watchdog Timer    Digital Inputs    38    CLS200 Series User   s Guide                                                    TB50 or TB18 SSR SSR SSR  oe       t       Heat Output   __   Cool Output An  Alarm Output mP mm  Common                   Figure 2 24 Output Connections Using  External Power Supply    The CPU watchdog timer constantly monitors the micro   processor  It is a sink output located on TB50 terminal 6 or  TB18 terminal 3  The output can be connected to an exter   nal circuit or device in order to determine if the controller  is powered and oper
226. s  or resistance   ohms   The item or substance that is to be  heated or cooled     Loop Alarm   Any alarm system that includes high and low  process  deviation band  deadband  digital out   puts  and auxiliary control outputs     Low Deviation Alarm   Warns that the process is below the setpoint   but above the low process variable  It can be  used as either an alarm or control function     Low Process Alarm   A signal that is tied to a set minimum value  that can be used as either an alarm or control  function     Low Reading   An input level corresponding to the low pro   cess value  For linear inputs  the low reading is  a percentage of the full scale input range  For  pulse inputs  the low reading is expressed in  cycles per second  Hz      Manual Mode  A selectable mode that has no automatic con   trol aspects  The operator sets output levels     Manual Reset  See Reset     Milliampere  mA   One thousandth of an ampere     MMI  Man machine interface        N    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Glossary    NO Key Reset  A method for resetting the controller   s memory   for instance  after an EPROM change      Noise  Unwanted electrical signals that usually pro   duce signal interference in sensors and sensor  circuits  See also Electromagnetic Interfer   ence     Noise Suppression   The use of components to reduce electrical  interference that is caused by making or  breaking electrical contact  or by inductors     Nonlinear   Through Anafaze software  the Nonlinear field  sets 
227. s 55  Table 3 2   Control Status Symbols on the Bar Graph and Single Loop Displays 56  Table 3 3   Alarm Type and Symbols 59    4 Setup    Table 4 1   Global Parameters 74   Table 4 2   Job Select Inputs 76   Table 4 3   Job Selected for Various Input States 76  Table 4 4   Firmware Option Codes 81   Table 4 5   Setup Loop Input 82   Table 4 6   CLS200 Input Types and Ranges 83  Table 4 7   Input Character Sets 84   Table 4 8   Input Reading Offset 85   Table 4 9   Display Formats 87   Table 4 10   Setup Loop Control Parameters 90  Table 4 11   Setup Loop Outputs 93   Table 4 12   Heat  Cool Output Types 94   Table 4 183   Setup Loop Alarms 99   Table 4 14   Manual I O Test 103    5 Extruder Control    Table 5 1   Default Control Parameters for Fan Cool Output 109  Table 5 2   Default Control Parameters for Oil Cool Output 109  Table 5 3   Default Control Parameters for H2O Cool Output 109    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze xiii    List of Tables CLS200 Series User   s Guide    6 Enhanced Features    Table 6 1   Application Example  Setting Up Process Variable Retransmit 117  Table 6 2   Application Example  Setting Up Cascade Control 122   Table 6 3   Application Example  Setting Up Ratio Control 128   Table 6 4   Application Example  Setting Up Remote Setpoint 130   Table 6 5   Application Example  Setting Up Differential Control 132    7 Ramp Soak    Table 7 1   Ramp Soak Specifications 135   Table 7 2   Trigger Latch Logic 143   Table 7 3   Display Formats 145   Table
228. s JU2  JU3  JU4  and JU5 on the board     Use tweezers to carefully grasp the jumpers and gen   tly slide them off the pins     5  Use tweezers to gently slide jumpers JU2  JU3  JU4  and JU5 onto the correct pins  see Figure 9 5      6  Ifyou are configuring the controller as the last device  on an EIA TIA 485 network  move JU1 to the B posi   tion     7  Reassemble the controller     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 179    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring CLS200 Series User s Guide    Installing Scaling Resistors    A    CAUTION     Resistors are installed for all inputs on the CLS200  Inputs  with signal ranges between  10 and  60 mV use 0 Q resis   tors in the RC position only  All other input signals require  special input scaling resistors     Scaling resistors are soldered to the circuit    board  Only qualified technicians should at   tempt to install or remove these components   Improper techniques  tools or materials can  result in damage to the controller that is not  covered by the warranty     CLS204 and CLS208 Input Circuit    NOTE     180    The CLS204 and CLS208 can accept differential thermo   couple  mV   dc   V     dc   mA   dc  and RTD inputs  Un   less ordered with special inputs these controller accept only  signals within the standard range  10 to 60mV   dc      To accommodate other signals  the input circuit must be  modified  When configured for thermocouple inputs  0 Q re   sistors are installed in all RC locations  To accommodate  volt
229. s available on 34  sample time 85  scaling and calibration 186  scaling parameters 86 89  specifications 201  technical information 34  wiring 34  PV  see process variable    R   RAM 7 177   ramp soak 133 152  assigning profiles to loops 148  continuing from hold 150    228 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User s Guide    cycle number 147  decimal shift 145  editing a profile while it is running 149  events 141  firmware option code 81  holding a profile 150  mode symbols on display 146 147  mode  setting 147  overview 133 135  power failure while running profile 152  process variable retransmit  see process variable  retransmit  profile setup parameters 137 143  resetting a profile 151  running a profile 148  screens for RAMP SOAK key 145  specifications 135  time base 137  time remaining 147  tolerance 143  tolerance alarm  see alarms  tolerance  triggers 142  RAMP SOAK key 54  assigning profiles 148  cycle number 147  does not work 64  69  170  locking and unlocking 78  screens accessed by pressing 145  set mode 147  time remaining 147  unassigning profiles 148  RAMP SOAK TIME BASE  default value 74  description 137  location 73  136  233  ratio control 124 132  application example 126  129  131  differential control 131  remote analog setpoint 129  setting up  example 127  129  131  setup parameters 125 126  RATIO CONTROL CTRL RATIO  description 126  location 112  233  RATIO CONTROL MAX SP  description 125  location 112  233  RATIO CONTROL MIN SP  description 125  location
230. s power sup   ply  When using multiple Serial DACs  the controller can   not provide sufficient current  use the 5V   dc  output from  the CLS200 power supply    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 2  Installation    Daisy chain up to                                                                            Controller 16 Serial DACs  Power Supply      Serial DAC   5V 1  5V In  5V Common 7 2 COM In  15V Common          3 CLK In  TB50 or TB18 4 Data In  Serial DAC Clock  5   Out  Control Output  6  Out  Load   4          Figure 2 30 Single Multiple Serial DACs    Serial Communications    EIA TIA 232 Interface    Doc   0600 3050 2000    The CLS200 series controllers are factory configured for  EIA TIA 232 communications unless otherwise specified  when purchased  However  the communications are jump   er selectable  so you can switch between EJA TIA 232 and  EIA TIA 485  See Changing Communications on page 179     EIA TIA 232 provides communication to the serial port of  an IBM PC or compatible computer  It is used for single   controller installations where the cable length does not ex   ceed 50 feet  15 2 m      The EIA TIA 232 interface is a standard three wire inter   face  See the table below for connection information    If you are using EIA TIA 232 communications with  grounded thermocouples  use an optical isolator between  the controller and the computer to prevent ground loops   Table 2 8 shows EIA TIA 232 connections for 25 
231. sensor to measure  a process variable and makes decisions based  on that feedback     Cold Junction  Connection point between thermocouple met   als and the electronic instrument     Common Mode Rejection Ratio   The ability of an instrument to reject electrical  noise  with relation to ground  from a common  voltage  Usually expressed in decibels  dB      Communications   The use of digital computer messages to link  components  See also Serial Communications   Baud Rate     Control Action   The response of the PID control output relative  to the error between the process variable and  the setpoint  For reverse action  usually heat   ing   as the process decreases below the set   point the output increases  For direct action   usually cooling   as the process increases  above the setpoint  the output increases     Control Status   The type of action that a controller uses  For  example  on off  time proportioning  PID  auto   matic or manual  and combinations of these     214 Watlow Anafaze    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Current   The rate of flow of electricity  The unit of mea   sure is the ampere  A     1 ampere   1 coulomb per second     Cycle Time   The time required for a controller to complete  one on off on cycle  It is usually expressed in  seconds     Cyclic Redundancy Check  CRC    An error checking method in communications   It provides a high level of data security but is  more difficult to implement than Block Check  Character  BCC   See also Block Check Ch
232. t  type for the affected loops     b  Verify that sensors are properly connected     3  Ifthe sensors are correctly connected  with power on to  the heaters check for high common mode voltage     a  Seta voltmeter to measure volts ac   b  Connect the negative lead to a good earth ground     c  One by one  check each input for ac voltage by  connecting the positive lead on the voltmeter to  the positive and negative sensor input connec   tions  The process variable should indicate ambi   ent temperature  If it does not  contact your  supplier to return the unit for repair  See Return   ing Your Unit on page 164        NOTE  Noise in excess of 1V    ac  should be elimi   nated by correctly grounding the CLS200   See Wiring the Power Supply on page 25     4  Verify the sensors     e For thermocouples  remove the thermocouple  leads and use a digital voltmeter to measure the  resistance between the positive and negative  thermocouple leads  A value of 2 to 20 Q is nor   mal  Readings in excess of 200 Q indicate a prob   lem with the sensor    e For RTDs  measure between the IN  and IN  ter   minals of TB1  RTD inputs should read between  20 and 250 Q     5  To verify that the controller hardware is working cor   rectly  check any input  except the pulse input or an  RTD  as follows     a  Disconnect the sensor wiring     b  Setthe INPUT TYPEtoJ T Cinthe SETUP LOOP  INPUT menu     c  Place a short across the input  The controller  should indicate the ambient temperature on the  ch
233. t control     For two zone cascade control systems  the PID settings for  both loops  the primary plus the secondary  must be opti   mized for good temperature control     See Chapter 4  Setup for information on tuning PID loops     Ratio control allows the process variable of one loop  mas   ter loop   multiplied by a ratio  to be the setpoint of another  loop  ratio loop   You can assign any process variable to de   termine the setpoint of a ratio loop     By adjusting the ratio control parameters  you can adjust  the influence that the master loop process variable has on  the setpoint of the ratio loop                 Maximum SP        O  Q  D   99   Q  fa   re       2  T fo   ad Minimum SP   SP Differential   Minimum Maximum  PV PV  Master Loop Process Variable   SP  Setpoint    PV  Process Variable    Figure 6 7 Relationship Between the Master  Loop   s Process Variable and the  Ratio Loop   s Setpoint    Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    NOTE     Chapter 6  Enhanced Features    Ratio control cannot be used on the same    control loop as cascade control  However   both features may be used in the same multi   loop controller     Setup Loop Ratio Control Menu    Master Loop    Minimum Setpoint    Maximum Setpoint    Doc   0600 3050 2000    The ratio control parameters appear in the SETUP LOOP  RATIO CONTROL menu     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    SETUP LOOP 02          RATIO CONTROL        ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Press YES to set up th
234. t type  for the loop is set to time proportioning  TP      Selectable values  1 to 255 seconds     Select the Serial DAC output signal     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SDAC MODE     VOLTAGE    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  CURRENT or VOLTAGE        Set the low output signal level for the Serial DAC  The Se   rial DAC converts 0  output from the controller to the val   ue set here     Set the high and low values to match the input range of the  output device  For instance  if the output device has a 0 00   10 00 V range  set the SDAC LO VALUE to0 00 VDC and  set the SDAC HI VALUE to 10 00 VDC     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SDAC LO VALUE     0 00 VDC    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0 00 to 9 00 VDC or 0 0 to 19 90  MA  This value must be less than the SDAC HI VALUE        Set the high output signal level for the Serial DAC  The Se   rial DAC converts 100  output from the controller to the  value set here     Set the high and low values to match the range of the out   put device  For instance  if the output device has a 4 to 20    Watlow Anafaze 95    Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    mA range  set the SDAC HI VALUE to 20 00 MA and the  SDAC LO VALUE to 4 00 MA     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 SDAC HI VALUE           10 00 VDC    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  0 10 to 10 00 VDC or 0 10 to 20 00  mA  This value must be greater than the SDAC LO VALUE           Heat or Cool Output Action    Select the control action for 
235. ted by Input Reading Range 87  Figure 4 4   Linear and Nonlinear Outputs 98   Figure 4 5   Digital Inputs Screen 104    5 Extruder Control  Figure 5 1   Cool Output Nonlinear Output Curve 108    6 Enhanced Features    Figure 6 1   Enhanced Features Option Menus 112   Figure 6 2   Linear Scaling of Process Variable for Retransmit 115   Figure 6 3   Application Using Process Variable Retransmit 116   Figure 6 4   Relationship Between the Primary Loop   s Output and the Secondary  Loop   s Setpoint 119   Figure 6 5   Application Using Cascade Control 121   Figure 6 6   Secondary Loop Setpoint Related to Primary Loop Output 123   Figure 6 7   Relationship Between the Master Loop   s Process Variable and the Ratio  Loop   s Setpoint 124   Figure 6 8   Application Using Ratio Control 127    7 Ramp Soak    Figure 7 1   Sample Ramp Soak Profile 133  Figure 7 2   Setup Ramp Soak Profiles Menu 136  Figure 7 3   Positive and Negative Tolerances 143  Figure 7 4   Ramp Soak Screens 145    x Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide List of Figures    8 Tuning and Control    Figure 8 1   On Off Control 154   Figure 8 2   Proportional Control 155   Figure 8 3   Proportional and Integral Control 155   Figure 8 4   Proportional  Integral and Derivative Control 156   Figure 8 5   Time Proportioning and Distributed Zero Crossing Waveforms 157    9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Figure 9 1   Removal of Electronics Assembly from Case 177  Figure 9 2   Screws Locati
236. ter 6  Enhanced Features    Differential control is a simple application of the ratio con   trol option  used to control one process  ratio loop  at a dif   ferential  or offset  to another  master loop   To use  differential control  set the ratio value to 1 0 to provide the  desired offset     Differential Control Example  Thermoforming    Doc   0600 3050 2000    A thermal forming application requires that the outside  heaters operate at a higher temperature than the center  heaters  The differential control point is determined by the  master loop which is using infrared  IR  sensors for temper   ature feedback  Secondary loops use thermocouples for  feedback     The loop using the IR sensor as an input is assigned to the  master loop in the SETUP LOOP RATIO CONTROL menu   The secondary loop is the differential control loop  Setting  the setpoint differential  SP DIFF  to the desired offset will  produce the desired offset between the secondary and mas   ter loops     For example  the master loop can be controlled at 325   F  and the secondary loop at 375   F by using a differential of  50   F     Loop 1 must be set up for PID control of the setpoint at  325   F     To set up this application  you would do the following     1  Change the display to loop 2  and then enter the setup  parameters  Go to the first screen in Table 6 5     2  Follow the steps in Table 6 5 to configure the process  variable retransmit option     Watlow Anafaze 131    Chapter 6  Enhanced Features CL
237. terface  purchase an EKIA   TIA 232 tester with LED indicators  Attach the tester  between the controller and the computer  When the  computer sends data to the controller  the tester   s TX  LED should blink  When the computer receives data  from the controller  the RX LED should blink     You can also connect an oscilloscope to the transmit or  receive line to see whether data is being sent or re   ceived  If the serial port does not appear to be working   the software setup may need to be modified or the  hardware may need to be repaired or replaced     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Communications    Ground Loops    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Most communications problems are due to incorrect wiring  or incorrectly set communications parameters  Therefore   when there is a problem  check the wiring and communica   tions settings first  Verify the following     e Communications port  Software must be configured to  use the communications port to which the controller is  connected     e Software protocol  Set the controller to MOD  Modbus   for AnaWin or WatView  ANA  Anafaze  for Anasoft or  Anascan     e Controller address  Configure software to look for the  controller at the correct address  In a multiple control   ler installation  each controller must have a unique  address     e Baud rate  Software and controller must be set the  same     e Error checking  ANA protocol only   Software 
238. th loop 2 as the sec   ondary loop           LOOP PROCESS    02 CASCADE  LOOP  01    STATUS    UNITS    PRIM     ALARM _ SETPOINT OUT     Enter 01 to make loop 1 the primary loop  Press ENTER        LOOP PROCESS  02 CASCADE  BASE SP  150    ALARM _ SETPOINT    UNITS    STATUS OUT        The base setpoint corresponds to the 0  level output of the primary  loop  Enter the base setpoint of the secondary loop  For this exam   ple  we will assume a base setpoint of 150   F  which is the desired  water temperature  Press ENTER                02 CASCADE  MIN SP   350    ALARM _ SETPOINT    PROCESS          STATUS    UNITS N    Enter the minimum setpoint of the secondary loop  For this example   we will use a minimum setpoint of  350   F  Press ENTER           LOOP PROCESS    02 CASCADE  MAX SP  1400    ALARM _ SETPOINT       UNITS          STATUS             Enter the maximum setpoint of the secondary loop  For this exam   ple  we will use a maximum setpoint of 1400   F Press ENTER               _LOoP PROCESS    02 CASCADE  HT SPAN  40      ALARM __ SETPOINT    UNITS          STATUS OUT        Enter the heat span of the secondary loop  This is the span over  which the primary output from 0 to 100  is used to change the set   point  The desired setpoint range is 150 to 190   F We will assume  a linear rise in setpoint  so the heat span is 40   F  Press ENTER              LOOP    02 CASCADE  CL SPAN  0      ALARM _ SETPOINT    PROCESS UNITS             STATUS OUT           Enter the c
239. the  single loop display     72 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 4  Setup                                                                                                                                                          OUTPUT STATUS           UT SCALING  PV                                                                                                           COOL CONTROL  OUTPUT     LO PROC ALARM    OUTPUT     SETUP GLOBAL SETUP LOOP SETUP LOOP SETUP LOOP SETUP LOOP MANUAL 1 0  PARAMETERS  INPUT  CONTROL PARAMS  OUTPUTS  ALARMS  TEST  LOAD SETUP INPUT TYPE  HEAT CONTROL PB  HEAT CONTROL HI PROC ALARM DIGITAL INPUTS  FROM JOB  OUTPUT  SETPT   SAVE SETUP LOOP NAME  HEAT CONTROL TI  HEAT OUTPUT TYPE    HI PROC ALARM TEST DIGITAL  TO JOB  TYPE  OUTPUT   JOB SELECT INPUT UNITS  HEAT CONTROL TD  HEAT OUTPUT HI PROC ALARM DIGITAL OUTPUT  DIG INPUTS  CYCLE TIME   TP  OUTPUT  NUMBER XX  JOB SEL DIG INS INPUT READING HEAT CONTROL SDAC PARAMETERS DEV ALARM KEYPAD TEST  ACTIVE  OFFSET FILTER   SDAC  VALUE   OUTPUT OVERRIDE     REVERSED T C COOL CONTROL PB  HEAT OUTPUT HI DEV ALARM DISPLAY TEST  DIG INPUT  DETECT  ACTION  TYPE   OVERRIDE DIG INPUT PULSE COOL CONTROL TI  HEAT OUTPUT HI DEV ALARM  IN ACTIVE  SAMPLE TIME  LIMIT  OUTPUT     Pulse input   STARTUP ALARM COOL CONTROL TD  HEAT OUTPUT LO DEV ALARM  DELAY  DISP FORMAT  LIMIT TIME  TYPE     Linear and pulse   RAMP SOAK COOL CONTROL SENSOR FAIL LO DEV ALARM  TIME BASE  INPUT SC
240. the host or the converter to the first CLS200   and from that point run a second cable to the next CLS200   and so on   See Figure 2 33      If necessary for servicing  instead of connecting each con   troller directly into the next  install a terminal strip or con   nector as close as possible to each CLS200  run a  communications cable from one terminal strip to the next  and connect the controllers to the bus with short lengths of  cable     Watlow Anafaze 47    Chapter 2  Installation    232 Communications       CLS200 Series User   s Guide    To avoid unacceptable interference  use less than 10 feet   3 m  of cable from the terminal or connector to the CLS200  serial port     Some systems may experience problems with sensor signal  reading if the commons of multiple controllers are connect   ed  See Signal Common on page 48     Refer to Termination on page 48 for more on terminating  resistors     Connect the shield drain to earth ground only at computer  or host end     485 Communications          Serial Port       Optically  Isolatin  232 to 485  Converter                      Shielded Twisted Pair Cable    x oN    First CLS200 Second CLS200 Last CLS200    Signal Common    Termination    48    Figure 2 33 Recommended System  Connections    For usual installations  do not connect the dc commons of  the controllers together or to the converter or host device   Use an optically isolating EIA TIA 232 to 485 converter to  prevent problems with sensor readings     In order f
241. the output  Normally  heat out   puts are set to reverse action and cool outputs are set to di   rect action  When output action is set to REVERSE  the  output goes up when the process variable goes down  When  set to DIRECT  the output goes up when the process vari   able goes up     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT OUTPUT    ACTION  REVERSE    ALARM _ SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values  REVERSE or DIRECT        Heat or Cool Output Limit    This parameter limits the maximum PID control output for  a loop   s heat or cool output  This limit may be continuous   or it or it may be in effect for a specified number of seconds   see the next parameter   If you choose a timed limit  the  output limit time restarts when the controller powers up  and whenever the loop goes from manual to automatic con   trol  The output limit only affects loops under automatic  control  It does not affect loops under manual control     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT OUTPUT    LIMIT   100     ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  0 to 100      Heat or Cool Output Limit Time    Set a time limit for the output limit set at the previous pa   rameter     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    01 HEAT OUTPUT    LIMIT TIME  CONT    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT           Selectable values  1 to 999 seconds  or to CONT  continu   ous      96 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 4  Setup    Sensor Fail Heat or Cool Output    NOTE     A    WARNING     When a sensor fail al
242. the system to linear control  or to one of  two nonlinear control options  Input 0 for lin   ear  1 or 2 for nonlinear     O    Offset   The difference in temperature between the set   point and the actual process temperature  Off   set is the error in the process variable that is  typical of proportional only control     On Off Control   A method of control that turns the output full  on until setpoint is reached  and then off until  the process error exceeds the hysteresis     Open Loop  A control system with no sensory feedback     Operator Menus   The menus accessible from the front panel of a  controller  These menus allow operators to set  or change various control actions or features     Optical Isolation   Two electronic networks that are connected  through an LED  Light Emitting Diode  and a  photoelectric receiver  There is no electrical  continuity between the two networks     Output  Control signal action in response to the differ   ence between setpoint and process variable     Output Type  The form of PID control output  such as time    Watlow Anafaze 217    Glossary    proportioning  distributed zero crossing  Serial  DAC or analog  Also the description of the elec   trical hardware that makes up the output     Overshoot  The amount by which a process variable  exceeds the setpoint before it stabilizes     P    Panel Lock  A feature that prevents operation of the front  panel by unauthorized people     PID   Proportional  Integral  Derivative  A control  status
243. tic  to manual or tune              ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     ENTER    Stores data or settings  e Assigns output power and advances to the next  level of manual loops BACK   parameter   e Selects a menu e Cancels editing     Starts scanning mode       or parameter and returns to a  if pressed twice   CHNG   Answers YES to previous menu  SP YES NO prompts  e Changes process    Increases a  setpoint value or choice ne    e Skips a menu or parameter    e Answers NO to YES NO  prompts    e Decreases a value or choice    Figure 3 2 CLS200 Front Panel    52 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Front Panel Keys    YES  up     Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    Press YES to     kd NO  down     Select a menu or parameter  Answer YES to the flashing   prompts  Increase a value or choice when editing    Stop scanning mode    Press NO to     Skip a menu or parameter when the prompt is blinking  Answer NO to the flashing   prompts   Decrease a value or choice when editing   Stop scanning mode   Perform a NO key reset    NOTE  Pressing the NO key on power up performs a  NO key reset  This procedure clears the RAM  and sets the controller   s parameters to their  default values  See NO Key Reset on page    176     B BACK    Press BACK to     ENTER    Cancel editing   Return to a previous menu   Switch between bar graph  single loop and job displays  Stop scanning mode    Press ENTER to     Doc   0600 3050 2000    Store data or a parameter choice after editi
244. tion   al features of a CLS200 controller equipped with Ex   truder Control Firmware     Chapter 6  Enhanced Features describes process  variable retransmit  ratio  differential and cascade  control features available with the enhanced features  option    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak explains how to set up and  use the features of the ramp soak option     Chapter 8  Tuning and Control describes available  control algorithms and provides suggestions for appli   cations    Chapter 9  Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring  includes troubleshooting  upgrading and reconfigur   ing procedures for technical personnel     Watlow Anafaze 1    Chapter 1  System Overview    Getting Started    Safety Symbols    WARNING     CAUTION     Initial Inspection    A    A    NOTE     CLS200 Series User   s Guide    e Chapter 10  Linear Scaling Examples provides an  example configuring a pressure sensor  a flow sensor   and an encoder using linear scaling     e Chapter 11  Specifications lists detailed specifica   tions of the controller and optional components     The following sections provide information regarding prod   uct features  technical descriptions  safety requirements   and preparation for operation     These symbols are used throughout this manual        Indicates a potentially hazardous situation  which  if not avoided  could result in death or  serious injury     Indicates a potentially hazardous situation    which  if not avoided  could result in minor or  moderate injury or property damage  
245. tive control corrects for overshoot by anticipating  the behavior of the process variable and adjusting the out   put appropriately  For example  if the process variable is    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 155    Chapter 8  Tuning and Control    Heat and Cool Outputs    156    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    rapidly approaching the setpoint from below  derivative  control reduces the output  anticipating that the process  variable will reach setpoint  Use it to reduce overshoot and  oscillation of the process variable common to PI control   Figure 8 4 shows a process under full PID control     x Setpoint                  Proportional  Band          t    process Variable          Figure 8 4 Proportional  Integral and Deriva   tive Control    Each loop may have one or two outputs  Often a heater is  controlled according to the feedback from a thermocouple   in which case only one output is needed     In other applications  two outputs may be used for control  according to one input  For example  a system with a heater  and a proportional valve that controls cooling water flow  can be controlled according to feedback from one thermo   couple     In such systems  the control algorithm avoids switching too  frequently between heat and cool outputs  The on off algo   rithm uses the SPREAD parameter to prevent such oscilla   tions  see Spread on page 92   When PID control is used for  one or both loop outputs  both the SPREAD parameter and  PID parameters determine when contro
246. tlow Anafaze 7    Chapter 1  System Overview    Front Panel Description    TB50    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    The display and touch keypad provide an intelligent way to  operate the controller  The display has 16 alphanumeric or  graphic characters per line  The 8 key keypad allows you to  change the operating parameters  controller functions  and  displays    The information packed displays show process variables   setpoints  and output levels for each loop  A bar graph dis   play  single loop display  scanning display and an alarm  display offer a real time view of process conditions  Two ac   cess levels allow operator changes and supervisor changes     WATLOW ANAFAZE CLS200    PROCESS UNITS          ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT   MAN CHNG    AUTO SP YES        Figure 1 4 CLS200 Front Panel       The TB50 is a screw terminal interface for control wiring  which allows you to connect relays  encoders and discrete I   O devices to the CLS200  The screw terminal blocks accept    wires as large as 18 AWG  0 75 mm2   A 50 pin SCSI cable  connects the TB50 to the CLS200                                                     Q  a        co    co     co co      co o co    l   sls  j   8 cos  S co     co   co     co    co     co 8 co     co o c02 O    co 8 co  NS  fall E N    ED 8  so  2e B     Q  Figure 1 5 TB50  Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    CLS200 Cabling    Safety    External Safety Devices    Doc   0600 3050 2000    A    WARNING     Chapt
247. troller  The encoder generates 900  pulses for every inch the conveyor moves  You want to mea   sure conveyor speed in feet per minute  FPM     Setup    The encoder input is connected to the controller   s pulse in   put  The INPUT TYPE for the loop is set to PULSE  A one   second sample time gives adequate resolution of the con   veyor   s speed  The resolution is     1 pulse _ 60 seconds 1 inch 1 foot  1 second 1 minute 900 pulses 12 inches         0 006 FPM    A DISP FORMAT of  99 99 TO  300 00 is appropriate   The input readings are as follows    e At 0 Hz  the input reading will be 0 00 FPM    e At the maximum pulse rate of the CLS200  2000 Hz                  2000 pulses 60 seconds 1 inch 1 foot _  1 second 1 minute   900 pulses 12 inches _ AT EEM  Table 10 5 Scaling Values   Parameter Prompt Value  High Process Variable   HIGH PV 11 11 FPM  High Sensor Reading   HIGH RDG 2000 Hz  Low Process Variable   LO PV 0 FPM  Low Sensor Reading LO RDG 0 Hz                192 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000          Specifications    This chapter contains specifications for the CLS200 series  controllers  TB50 terminal board  Dual DAC module  Serial  DAC module and the CLS200 power supply     CLS200 System Specifications    This section contains CLS200 series controller specifica   tions for environmental specifications and physical dimen   sions  inputs  outputs  the serial interface and system  power requirements     The controller described consists of a processor module an
248. ts pulses for the  amount of time you set here before calculating the frequn   cy  The controller scales this frequency and uses the result   ing value as the process variable for the pulse loop   Generally  the longer the pulse sample time  the more sta   ble the process variable  but the slower the response of the  pulse loop     This parameter is available only for loop 5 on the CLS204   loop 9 on the CLS208 or loop 17 on the CLS216     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    17 INPUT PULSE  SAMPLE TIME   1S    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  1 to 20 seconds     Watlow Anafaze 85       Chapter 4  Setup CLS200 Series User s Guide    Linear Scaling Parameters    The following parameters are only available if the input  type is LINEAR or PULSE  These parameters let you scale  the raw input readings  in millivolts or Hertz  to the engi   neering units of the process variable     For linear inputs  the input reading is in percent  0 to  100   representing the 0 to 60mV input range of the con   troller  For pulse inputs  the input reading is in Hertz  cy   cles per second      The scaling function is defined by two points on a conver   sion line  This line relates the process variable  PV  to the  input signal  The engineering units of the process variable  can be any units   the graph in Figure 4 2 shows PSI as an  example     20 PSI       High Process                                  Variable    Process  Variable    Low Process  Variable    0 PSI o   omv Low High samy  Loar 
249. u assign a profile to a loop  the profile does not  start immediately  Instead  it goes to the ready segment   segment 0  and stays there until you put the profile in run  mode     You can set a setpoint  assign events  and set event states  for the ready segment  Use this parameter to set the ready  segment setpoint  Setting the setpoint to OFF ensures that  control outputs for the loop running the profile will not  come on     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    A READY SEGMENT    SETPOINT  OFF    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Selectable values   999 to 9999  or OFF  See Setpoints  and Tolerances for Various Input Types on page 144        Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 7  Ramp Soak    Ready Segment Edit Events    Ready Event Output    Press YES to set or edit the ready state for all outputs that  are not used for control or for the Serial DAC clock  When  you assign a profile  the controller starts the ready seg   ment  it goes to the setpoint and puts all the outputs in the  state you set here  The outputs stay in the states they are  set to until their states are changed at the end of subse   quent segments        LOOP  PROCESS UNITS  A READY SEGMENT  EDIT EVENTS      ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT     Press NO to advance to EXTERNAL RESET INPUT NUMBER              Press NO to increment the output number  PressYES to set  the event state to ON or OFF     This parameter appears only if you answered YES to READY  SEGMENT EDIT EVENTS         LOOP
250. u is SETUP    GLOBAL PARAMETERS  Refer to Figure 4 1 for a listing of  all top level menus and their related parameters     1  Select the single loop display for the loop to set up     2  Enter the three key sequence   See How to Access the  Setup Menus on page 71   The first menu is displayed   SETUP GLOBAL PARAMETERS     3  To select the appropriate menu     e Press NO to move from one menu to the next  The  menus wrap around  pressing NO continuously  advances through the top level menus     e Press YES to enter the displayed menu   4  To select the parameter to be edited     e Press NO to advance from one parameter to the  next  Parameters do not wrap around     e Press YES to edit the displayed parameter   5  To edit the parameter setting     e Press up or down  YES or NO  to scroll to the value  or choice you want to select    e Press ENTER to accept the change    or    press BACK to cancel the change without saving     6  Select another parameter and repeat from step 4  or  press BACK to return to the top level menu     7  Select another menu and repeat from step 3     or    press BACK to exit the setup menus     The following sections tell more about the parameters for  each of the six top level menus  Each display illustration  contains the default value for that specific parameter  If  you have a controller with the enhanced features option   there will be additional menus   See Chapter 6  Enhanced  Features      Figure 4 1 shows the top level menus accessible from 
251. urn to sin   gle loop display   Repeat from Step 1 for the cool output  if available     Press BACK at any time to discard your changes and  return to single loop display     Autotuning is a process by which a controller determines  the correct PID parameters for optimum control  This sec   tion explains how to autotune the CLS200     Before autotuning the controller  it must be installed with  control and sensor circuitry and the thermal load in place     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Background    Performing an Autotune    Doc   0600 3050 2000    NOTE     Chapter 3  Using the CLS200    It must be safe to operate the thermal system  and the ap   proximate desired operating temperature  setpoint  must  be known     The technician or engineer performing the autotune should  know how to use the controller front panel or MMI software  interface  e g   AnaWin or Anasoft  to do the following     1  Select a loop to operate and monitor    2  Seta loop   s setpoint    3  Change a loop   s control status  MAN  TUNE  AUTO    4    Read and change the controller   s global and loop setup  parameters     Autotuning is performed at the maximum allowed output   If you have set an output limit  autotuning occurs at that  value  Otherwise  the control output is set to 100  during  the autotune  Only the heat output  output 1  of a loop may  be autotuned     The PID constants are calculated according to process   s re   sponse to the output  The loop n
252. ut available to be used as a  control or an alarm output  See Enable or Disable Heat or  Cool Outputs on page 94  The CPU watchdog timer output  can be used to monitor the state of the controller with an  external circuit or device  See CPU Watchdog Timer on  page 38     Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 35    Chapter 2  Installation    36    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 2 3 Digital Output States and Values  Stored in the Controller                      State Value Description  Off High Open circuit  On Low Sinking current to common       The digital outputs sink current from the load to the con   troller common  The load may powered by the 5V     dc   supplied by the controller at the TB50  Alternately  an ex   ternal power supply may be used to drive loads     Keep in mind the following points when using an external   power supply    e The CLS200 power supply available from Watlow  Anafaze includes a 5V     dc  supply  When using it to  supply output loads  connect the 5V   dc  common to  the 15V   dc  common at the power supply     e     Do not exceed  24 volts     e Ifyou tie the external load to earth ground  or if you  cannot connect it as shown in  See Figure 2 22   then  use a solid state relay     All digital outputs are sink outputs referenced to the  CLS200 series controller common supply  These outputs  are low  pulled to common  when they are on     The outputs conduct current when they are low or on  The  maximum current sink capability is 60 mA at 24
253. uts                            Setting Enables  1 Jobs 1 2  2 Jobs 1 4  3 Jobs 1 8  NONE Disables remote job selection       Table 4 3 shows which input states select which jobs  When  nothing is connected  the inputs are all false and job 1 is se   lected     Table 4 3 Job Selected for Various Input                                                 States  re C ai Job  Digital Input 3   Digital Input 2   Digital Input 1 No  F F F 1  F F T 2  F T F 3  F T T 4  T F F 5  T F T 6  T T F 7  T T T 8  Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 4  Setup    Job Select Digital Inputs Active    Specify which state is considered    true    for the digital in   puts used for job selection  Default is LOW  meaning that an  input must be pulled low to be considered true  If HIGH is  selected  an input will be considered true unless it is pulled  low     LOOP PROCESS UNITS    JOB SEL DIG INS    ACTIVE   LOW    ALARM SETPOINT STATUS OUT        Selectable values  HIGH or LOW     Changing this setting has the effect of reversing the order  of the jobs in Table 4 3     Output Override Digital Input    A    WARNING     To enable the output override feature  select a digital in   put  When the specified input is activated  the controller  sets all loops to manual mode at the output levels specified  atthe SENSOR FAIL HT OUTPUT and SENSOR FAIL CL  OUTPUT parameters in the SETUP LOOP OUTPUTS menu        LOOP PROCESS UNITS    OUTPUT OVERRIDE    DIG INPUT  NONE    AL
254. uts   Control Alarm    Pulse Input    a           Signal Inputs                   ROO    Q    yy  D CLS200  Power supply    g amp o  gt     CLS200 with TB18       Signal Inputs       11 Digital Outputs  Control Alarm     2 Digital Inputs  1 Digital Pulse Input Power supply    Figure 2 1 CLS200 System Components    Mounting Controller Components    NOTE     Install the controller in a location free from excessive heat   more than 50   C  122   F    dust  and unauthorized han   dling  Electromagnetic and radio frequency interference  can induce noise on sensor wiring  Select locations for the  CLS200 and TB50 such that wiring can be routed clear of  sources of interference such as high voltage wires  power  switching devices and motors     For indoor use only     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    A    WARNING     Recommended Tools    Mounting the Controller    Doc   0600 3050 2000    Chapter 2  Installation    To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock  in     stall the CLS200 in a controlled environment   relatively free of contaminants     Use any of the following tools to cut a hole of the appropri   ate size in the panel     e Jigsaw and metal file  for stainless steel and heavy   weight panel doors     e Greenlee 1 8 DIN rectangular punch  Greenlee part  number 600 68   for most panel materials and thick   nesses     e  Nibbler and metal file  for aluminum and lightweight  panel doors     You will also need these tools    e Phillips h
255. wledge the alarm     2  If the error message remains  turn the power to the  controller off  then on again     3  Ifthe H W Gain error is reported  remove any connec   tions to the 5V   dc  reference  TB1 18  on the back of  the controller  If this corrects the problem  there was  an error in the wiring  You may need to consult tech   nical support to determine the correct wiring     4  Ifthe error persists  make a record of the settings  us   ing software   then perform a NO key reset  See NO   Key Reset on page 176     5  Ifthe error is not cleared  contact your supplier for fur   ther troubleshooting guidelines  See Returning Your  Unit on page 164     If the controller has failed  it is likely that it    was damaged by excessive voltage or noise   Before replacing the controller  troubleshoot  for noise and ground loops     If the CLS200 seems to function but the MAN AUTO  CHNG  SP  ALARM ACK  and RAMP SOAK keys do not respond when  you press them  the keypad is probably locked  Unlock the  keypad according to the instructions in Keyboard Lock Sta   tus on page 78     Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring    Checking Analog Inputs    If the process variable displayed in the software and on the  controller do not agree     1  Verify that the controller is communicating     2  Ifthe process variable indicated on the controller dis   play is incorrect     a  Verify that you have selected the correct inpu
256. y 10 to 95  non condensing             Table 11 34 Serial DAC Physical Specifications                Weight 0 76 Ib  0 34 kg  Length 5 4 inches 137 mm  Width 3 6 inches 91 mm  Height 1 8 inches 44 mm                        0 162 in  diameter        91 mm  0 3 in      8 mm     lt  gt           10 mm    Figure 11 9 Serial DAC Dimensions    Doc   0600 3050 2000 Watlow Anafaze 209    Chapter 11  Specifications    Serial DAC Inputs    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Table 11 35 Serial DAC Agency Approvals    Compliance       cot Electromagnetic Compatibility  EMC   CE Directive   directive 89 336 EEC       UL 916 Standard for Energy Manage   ment Equipment File E177240    UL and C UL             The Serial DAC requires a proprietary serial data signal  and the clock signal from the CLS200 via the TB50  Any  control output can be configured to provide the data signal   The Serial DAC also requires a 5V   dc  power input     Table 11 36 Serial DAC Inputs                                              Parameter Description  Data 4 mA maximum to DC COM  Open collector or HC CMOS logic levels  Clock 0 5 mA maximum to DC COM  Open collector or HC CMOS logic levels  Table 11 37 Serial DAC Power Requirements  Parameter Description  Voltage 4 75 to 5 25V   dc    300 mA maximum  Current 210 mA typical   20V   dc  out  210 Watlow Anafaze Doc   0600 3050 2000    CLS200 Series User   s Guide    Chapter 11  Specifications    Serial DAC Analog Outputs    Table 11 38 Serial DAC Analog Output Specif
257. ymbols       Alarm  Code    Bar Graph  Symbol    Alarm  Message    Alarm  Description          FS    F    T C BREAK    Failed Sensor  Break detected  in thermocouple circuit        RO    RTD OPEN    RTD Open  Break detected in  RTD circuit        RS    RTD SHORTED    RTD Short  Short detected in  RTD circuit        RT    REVERSED TC    Reversed Thermocouple   Reversed polarity detected in  thermocouple circuit        ST    T C SHORTED    Shorted Thermocouple  Short  detected in thermocouple cir   cuit        HP    No message    High Process Alarm  Process  variable has risen above the  set limit        HD    No message    High Deviation Alarm  Process  variable has risen above the  setpoint plus the deviation  alarm value        LP    No message    Low Process Alarm   Process variable has dropped  below the set limit        LD    No message    Low Deviation Alarm  Process  variable has dropped below the  setpoint minus the deviation  alarm value           AW       No message       Ambient Warning  Controller s  ambient temperature has  exceeded operating limits by  less than 5   C        Acknowledging an Alarm  Press ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm  If there are  other loops with alarm conditions  the Alarm display  switches to the next loop in alarm  Acknowledge all alarms  to clear the global alarm digital output  the keypad and dis   play won t work for anything else until you acknowledge  each alarm   The alarm symbols are displayed as long as  the alarm condition is v
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
MANUAL DEL USUARIO Sistema de Captura de  Pioneer SP-FS52 soundbar speaker  Samsung Tablet SM-T900 User's Manual    MGSP : Guide de l`utilisateur    tree&shrub concentrate  MANUEL D`UTILISATION - Metagro Edelstahltechnik AG  User Manual - Video  取扱説明書を見る    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file